[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2024010007A1 - Substrate layered body manufacturing method and substrate layered body - Google Patents

Substrate layered body manufacturing method and substrate layered body Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2024010007A1
WO2024010007A1 PCT/JP2023/024825 JP2023024825W WO2024010007A1 WO 2024010007 A1 WO2024010007 A1 WO 2024010007A1 JP 2023024825 W JP2023024825 W JP 2023024825W WO 2024010007 A1 WO2024010007 A1 WO 2024010007A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
laminate
resin layer
layer
substrate
group
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/JP2023/024825
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
智志 稲田
靖剛 茅場
雄三 中村
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Mitsui Chemicals Inc
Original Assignee
Mitsui Chemicals Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Mitsui Chemicals Inc filed Critical Mitsui Chemicals Inc
Priority to CN202380051289.7A priority Critical patent/CN119497906A/en
Priority to KR1020257000027A priority patent/KR20250021366A/en
Priority to JP2024532595A priority patent/JPWO2024010007A1/ja
Publication of WO2024010007A1 publication Critical patent/WO2024010007A1/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L25/00Assemblies consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid state devices
    • H01L25/03Assemblies consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid state devices all the devices being of a type provided for in a single subclass of subclasses H10B, H10D, H10F, H10H, H10K or H10N, e.g. assemblies of rectifier diodes
    • H01L25/04Assemblies consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid state devices all the devices being of a type provided for in a single subclass of subclasses H10B, H10D, H10F, H10H, H10K or H10N, e.g. assemblies of rectifier diodes the devices not having separate containers
    • H01L25/065Assemblies consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid state devices all the devices being of a type provided for in a single subclass of subclasses H10B, H10D, H10F, H10H, H10K or H10N, e.g. assemblies of rectifier diodes the devices not having separate containers the devices being of a type provided for in group H10D89/00
    • H01L25/0657Stacked arrangements of devices
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B17/00Layered products essentially comprising sheet glass, or glass, slag, or like fibres
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B18/00Layered products essentially comprising ceramics, e.g. refractory products
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B27/00Layered products comprising a layer of synthetic resin
    • B32B27/06Layered products comprising a layer of synthetic resin as the main or only constituent of a layer, which is next to another layer of the same or of a different material
    • B32B27/08Layered products comprising a layer of synthetic resin as the main or only constituent of a layer, which is next to another layer of the same or of a different material of synthetic resin
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B37/00Methods or apparatus for laminating, e.g. by curing or by ultrasonic bonding
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B37/00Methods or apparatus for laminating, e.g. by curing or by ultrasonic bonding
    • B32B37/14Methods or apparatus for laminating, e.g. by curing or by ultrasonic bonding characterised by the properties of the layers
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B9/00Layered products comprising a layer of a particular substance not covered by groups B32B11/00 - B32B29/00
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L21/00Processes or apparatus adapted for the manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or solid state devices or of parts thereof
    • H01L21/02Manufacture or treatment of semiconductor devices or of parts thereof
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L25/00Assemblies consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid state devices
    • H01L25/03Assemblies consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid state devices all the devices being of a type provided for in a single subclass of subclasses H10B, H10D, H10F, H10H, H10K or H10N, e.g. assemblies of rectifier diodes
    • H01L25/04Assemblies consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid state devices all the devices being of a type provided for in a single subclass of subclasses H10B, H10D, H10F, H10H, H10K or H10N, e.g. assemblies of rectifier diodes the devices not having separate containers
    • H01L25/065Assemblies consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid state devices all the devices being of a type provided for in a single subclass of subclasses H10B, H10D, H10F, H10H, H10K or H10N, e.g. assemblies of rectifier diodes the devices not having separate containers the devices being of a type provided for in group H10D89/00
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L25/00Assemblies consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid state devices
    • H01L25/03Assemblies consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid state devices all the devices being of a type provided for in a single subclass of subclasses H10B, H10D, H10F, H10H, H10K or H10N, e.g. assemblies of rectifier diodes
    • H01L25/04Assemblies consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid state devices all the devices being of a type provided for in a single subclass of subclasses H10B, H10D, H10F, H10H, H10K or H10N, e.g. assemblies of rectifier diodes the devices not having separate containers
    • H01L25/07Assemblies consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid state devices all the devices being of a type provided for in a single subclass of subclasses H10B, H10D, H10F, H10H, H10K or H10N, e.g. assemblies of rectifier diodes the devices not having separate containers the devices being of a type provided for in group subclass H10D
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L25/00Assemblies consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid state devices
    • H01L25/03Assemblies consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid state devices all the devices being of a type provided for in a single subclass of subclasses H10B, H10D, H10F, H10H, H10K or H10N, e.g. assemblies of rectifier diodes
    • H01L25/04Assemblies consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid state devices all the devices being of a type provided for in a single subclass of subclasses H10B, H10D, H10F, H10H, H10K or H10N, e.g. assemblies of rectifier diodes the devices not having separate containers
    • H01L25/075Assemblies consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid state devices all the devices being of a type provided for in a single subclass of subclasses H10B, H10D, H10F, H10H, H10K or H10N, e.g. assemblies of rectifier diodes the devices not having separate containers the devices being of a type provided for in group H10H20/00
    • H01L25/0756Stacked arrangements of devices
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L25/00Assemblies consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid state devices
    • H01L25/18Assemblies consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid state devices the devices being of the types provided for in two or more different main groups of the same subclass of H10B, H10D, H10F, H10H, H10K or H10N
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B2255/00Coating on the layer surface
    • B32B2255/20Inorganic coating
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B2255/00Coating on the layer surface
    • B32B2255/26Polymeric coating
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B2255/00Coating on the layer surface
    • B32B2255/28Multiple coating on one surface
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L2225/00Details relating to assemblies covered by the group H01L25/00 but not provided for in its subgroups
    • H01L2225/03All the devices being of a type provided for in the same main group of the same subclass of class H10, e.g. assemblies of rectifier diodes
    • H01L2225/04All the devices being of a type provided for in the same main group of the same subclass of class H10, e.g. assemblies of rectifier diodes the devices not having separate containers
    • H01L2225/065All the devices being of a type provided for in the same main group of the same subclass of class H10
    • H01L2225/06503Stacked arrangements of devices
    • H01L2225/06524Electrical connections formed on device or on substrate, e.g. a deposited or grown layer
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L2225/00Details relating to assemblies covered by the group H01L25/00 but not provided for in its subgroups
    • H01L2225/03All the devices being of a type provided for in the same main group of the same subclass of class H10, e.g. assemblies of rectifier diodes
    • H01L2225/04All the devices being of a type provided for in the same main group of the same subclass of class H10, e.g. assemblies of rectifier diodes the devices not having separate containers
    • H01L2225/065All the devices being of a type provided for in the same main group of the same subclass of class H10
    • H01L2225/06503Stacked arrangements of devices
    • H01L2225/06541Conductive via connections through the device, e.g. vertical interconnects, through silicon via [TSV]

Definitions

  • the present disclosure relates to a method for manufacturing a substrate laminate and a substrate laminate.
  • Patent Document 1 Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 4-132258
  • Patent Document 2 Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2010-226060
  • Patent Document 3 Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-47895
  • Direct bonding has the problem that voids are likely to occur due to fine irregularities and particles caused by wiring on the surface of the substrate.
  • a method of stacking semiconductor substrates and the like a method of bonding inorganic materials such as silicon oxide provided on the substrates is also considered.
  • the method of bonding inorganic materials of the substrates has the same problem as direct bonding that voids are likely to occur.
  • the adhesive is applied to the surface of the substrate, and then dried to a semi-cured state, and then the substrates are bonded together.
  • an adhesive to the bonding surfaces of the substrates to form an adhesive layer and bond the adhesive layers to each other.
  • a surface activation treatment such as plasma treatment or FAB (Fast Atom Bombardment) treatment.
  • the surface activation treatment may affect the resin contained in the adhesive layer, causing deterioration of the adhesive layer, which may affect reliability.
  • the bonding surface of the substrate may be cleaned in order to remove particles and the like on the bonding surface, but if an adhesive layer is provided on the bonding surface, there is a problem in that cleaning methods are limited.
  • One aspect of the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and includes providing a resin layer on the bonding surface of the substrate, and suppressing restrictions on the method of surface activation treatment and cleaning treatment of the bonding surface of the substrate.
  • An object of the present invention is to provide a method for manufacturing a substrate laminate and a laminate that can be used in this manufacturing method.
  • a first resin layer, a first substrate, and a first inorganic material layer are laminated in this order, the first resin layer is disposed on one surface, and the first inorganic material layer is laminated in this order.
  • a first laminate having a layer disposed on the other surface, a second resin layer, a second substrate, and a second inorganic material layer are laminated in this order, and the second resin layer is a second laminate that is disposed on one surface and the second inorganic material layer is disposed on the other surface; Laminating the first laminate and the second laminate by bringing the first resin layer of the first laminate into contact with the second inorganic layer of the second laminate.
  • the first laminate includes an electrode on a part of the surface of the first resin layer and a part of the surface of the first inorganic material layer
  • a through hole is provided in the first laminate and the second laminate from the first inorganic layer side surface to the second resin layer side surface.
  • the method for manufacturing a substrate laminate according to ⁇ 1> including the step of forming an electrode penetrating the first laminate and the second laminate in the through hole.
  • ⁇ 5> The method for manufacturing a substrate laminate according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 4>, including a step of cleaning the second inorganic material layer before the step B.
  • ⁇ 6> The method for manufacturing a substrate laminate according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 5>, including the step of providing a surface protective layer on the second inorganic material layer before the step B.
  • the composite modulus of elasticity of the first resin layer at 23° C. is 0.1 GPa or more and 20 GPa or less.
  • the curing rate of the first resin layer is 70% or more and 100% or less, ⁇
  • the surface roughness (Ra) of the first resin layer is 0.01 nm or more and 1.
  • the surface of the first resin layer has at least one functional group selected from the group consisting of a silanol group, an amino group, an epoxy group, a hydroxyl group, and a functional group having an unsaturated bond, ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 9>.
  • the first resin layer is siloxane bond
  • the first resin layer, the first substrate, and the first inorganic layer are arranged in this order, the first resin layer is disposed on one surface, and the first inorganic layer is disposed on the other surface of the first laminate; It has a second resin layer, a second substrate, and a second inorganic material layer in this order, the second resin layer being disposed on one surface, and the second inorganic material layer being disposed on the other surface.
  • a second laminate placed on the surface of the has The first laminate and the second laminate are laminated via the first resin layer of the first laminate and the second inorganic layer of the second laminate. , substrate laminate.
  • the first laminate includes an electrode on a part of the surface of the first resin layer and a part of the surface of the first inorganic material layer
  • the second laminate is a substrate laminate according to ⁇ 13>, wherein the second laminate includes an electrode on a part of the surface of the second resin layer and a part of the surface of the second inorganic material layer.
  • One aspect of the present invention is a method for manufacturing a substrate laminate in which a resin layer is provided on the bonding surface of the substrate, and limitations on methods of surface activation treatment and cleaning treatment of the bonding surface of the substrate are suppressed, and the manufacturing method A usable laminate can be provided.
  • 1a to 1h are schematic configuration diagrams showing Example 1 of the method for manufacturing a substrate stack of the present disclosure.
  • 2a to 2i are schematic configuration diagrams showing Example 2 of the method for manufacturing a substrate stack of the present disclosure.
  • a numerical range expressed using " ⁇ " means a range that includes the numerical values written before and after " ⁇ " as lower and upper limits.
  • the upper limit or lower limit described in one numerical range may be replaced with the upper limit or lower limit of another numerical range described step by step.
  • the upper limit or lower limit of the numerical range may be replaced with the values shown in the Examples.
  • a "substrate laminate” refers to a laminate having a structure in which two substrates, that is, a first substrate and a second substrate are joined via a first resin layer and a second inorganic material layer. means.
  • the substrate laminate may have three or more substrates, and two of the three or more substrates are bonded via the first resin layer and the second inorganic material layer. It may have a structure.
  • a “substrate” refers to "at least one of a first substrate and a second substrate”
  • a “resin layer” refers to "at least one of a first resin layer and a second resin layer.”
  • the term “inorganic layer” refers to "at least one of the first inorganic layer and the second inorganic layer.”
  • a first resin layer, a first substrate, and a first inorganic material layer are laminated in this order, and the first resin layer is disposed on one surface.
  • a first laminate in which the first inorganic material layer is disposed on the other surface, a second resin layer, a second substrate, and a second inorganic material layer are laminated in this order.
  • step A At least two laminates in which a resin layer, a substrate, and an inorganic material layer are laminated in this order are prepared in step A.
  • step B the resin layer (first resin layer) of one laminate is brought into contact with the inorganic material layer (second inorganic material layer) of the other laminate.
  • Laminate the two laminated bodies are heated at 100°C or higher to join them through the resin layer (first resin layer) and inorganic layer (second inorganic layer).
  • a substrate laminate having a structure is obtained.
  • the method for manufacturing a substrate laminate according to the present disclosure includes a step A of preparing a first laminate and a second laminate.
  • the first laminate includes a first resin layer, a first substrate, and a first inorganic material layer in this order, the first resin layer is disposed on one surface, and the first inorganic material layer is arranged on one surface. A layer is placed on the other surface.
  • the second laminate includes a second resin layer, a second substrate, and a second inorganic material layer in this order, the second resin layer is disposed on one surface, and the second an inorganic layer is disposed on the other surface.
  • the materials of the first substrate and the second substrate are not particularly limited, and may be any commonly used material. Note that the materials of the first substrate and the second substrate may be the same or different.
  • the first substrate and the second substrate include Si, Al, Ti, Zr, Hf, Fe, Ni, Cu, Ag, Au, Ga, Ge, Sn, Pd, As, Pt, Mg, In, Ta, and It is preferable that at least one element selected from the group consisting of Nb is included.
  • the materials of the first substrate and the second substrate include, for example, semiconductors: Si, InP, GaN, GaAs, InGaAs, InGaAlAs, SiC, oxides, carbides, nitrides: borosilicate glass (for example, Pyrex (registered trademark) )), quartz glass (SiO 2 ), sapphire, ZrO 2 , Si 3 N 4 , AlN, piezoelectric, dielectric: BaTiO 3 , LiNbO 3 , SrTiO 3 , diamond, metal: Al, Ti, Fe, Cu, Ag , Au, Pt, Pd, Ta, Nb, etc.
  • semiconductors Si, InP, GaN, GaAs, InGaAs, InGaAlAs, SiC, oxides, carbides, nitrides: borosilicate glass (for example, Pyrex (registered trademark) )), quartz glass (SiO 2 ), sapphire, ZrO 2
  • the first substrate and the second substrate may be made of other resins such as polydimethylsiloxane (PDMS), epoxy resin, phenol resin, polyimide, benzocyclobutene resin, and polybenzoxazole.
  • PDMS polydimethylsiloxane
  • epoxy resin epoxy resin
  • phenol resin phenol resin
  • polyimide polyimide
  • benzocyclobutene resin polybenzoxazole
  • the first substrate and the second substrate may have a multilayer structure.
  • a structure in which an inorganic layer such as silicon oxide, silicon nitride, or SiCN (silicon carbonitride) is formed on the surface of a silicon substrate, etc. or a structure in which an inorganic layer such as silicon oxide, silicon nitride, SiCN (silicon carbonitride), etc. , Chem), imide cross-linked siloxane resin, epoxy-modified siloxane, porous silica, organic cross-linked siloxane, organic-inorganic composite low-k such as black diamond (Applied Materials), etc., on a silicon substrate.
  • Si is used in semiconductor memories, LSI stacks, CMOS image sensors, MEMS encapsulation, optical devices, LEDs, etc.
  • SiO 2 can be used for semiconductor memory, LSI stacking, MEMS sealing, microchannels, CMOS image sensors, optical devices, LEDs, etc.
  • PDMS is a microchannel
  • InGaAlAs, InGaAs, InP are optical devices
  • the thickness of the first substrate and the second substrate is preferably 0.5 ⁇ m to 1 mm, more preferably 1 ⁇ m to 900 ⁇ m, and even more preferably 2 ⁇ m to 900 ⁇ m.
  • the shapes of the first substrate and the second substrate are also not particularly limited.
  • the first substrate and the second substrate are silicon substrates, they may be silicon substrates on which an interlayer insulating layer (low-k film) is formed. ), fine through holes, etc. may be formed.
  • the surface of the first substrate that contacts the first resin layer and the surface of the second substrate that contacts the second resin layer may be performed.
  • at least one functional group selected from the group consisting of a hydroxyl group, an epoxy group, a carboxy group, an amino group, and a mercapto group may be formed.
  • Examples of the above-mentioned surface treatment include plasma treatment, chemical treatment, and ozone treatment such as ultraviolet (UV) ozone treatment.
  • Hydroxyl groups can be provided on the surfaces of the first substrate and the second substrate by subjecting the surfaces to a surface treatment such as plasma treatment, chemical treatment, or ozone treatment such as UV ozone treatment.
  • the hydroxyl groups include Si, Al, Ti, Zr, Hf, Fe, Ni, Cu, Ag, Au, Ga, Ge, Sn, Pd, As, Pt, Mg, Preferably, it exists in a bonded state with at least one element selected from the group consisting of In, Ta, and Nb. It is preferable that the surface of the first substrate in contact with the first resin layer and the surface of the second substrate in contact with the second resin layer have silanol groups containing hydroxyl groups.
  • the epoxy group can be provided on each of the surfaces of the first substrate and the second substrate by performing surface treatment such as silane coupling with epoxy silane.
  • a carboxyl group can be provided on each of the surfaces of the first substrate and the second substrate by performing surface treatment such as silane coupling with carboxysilane.
  • the amino group can be provided on each of the surfaces of the first substrate and the second substrate by performing surface treatment such as silane coupling with aminosilane.
  • the mercapto group can be provided on each of the surfaces of the first substrate and the second substrate by performing surface treatment such as silane coupling with mercaptosilane.
  • a primer such as a silane coupling agent may be formed on the surface of at least one of the first substrate and the second substrate to which the resin material is applied.
  • the first resin layer is a layer placed on one surface of the first substrate
  • the second resin layer is a layer placed on one surface of the second substrate.
  • the first resin layer and the second resin layer are formed by applying a resin composition containing a resin material to one surface of the first substrate and one surface of the second substrate, respectively. It is formed by curing the respective layers.
  • the resin material contained in the resin composition is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include materials whose bond or structure is formed by crosslinking, such as polyimide, polyamide, polyamideimide, parylene, polyarylene ether, tetrahydronaphthalene, and octahydroanthracene.
  • examples include materials in which a nitrogen ring-containing structure is formed such as polybenzoxazal, polybenzoxazine, etc., materials in which a bond or structure is formed by crosslinking such as Si--O, and organic materials such as siloxane-modified compounds.
  • the resin material used to form the first resin layer and the resin material used to form the second resin layer may be the same or different.
  • Si—O bonds examples include structures represented by formulas (1) to (3) shown below.
  • the group bonding to Si may be substituted with an alkylene group, a phenylene group, etc.
  • an alkylene group a phenylene group, etc.
  • R 1 represents a methyl group, etc.
  • R 2 represents an alkylene group
  • a phenylene group, etc. is an integer greater than or equal to 0, and x+y is 3).
  • Examples of materials in which Si—O bonds are formed by crosslinking include compounds represented by the following formulas (4) and (5). Further, the structures represented by formulas (1) and (2) can be produced, for example, by heating and reacting the compounds represented by formulas (4) and (5).
  • Compound (A) has a cationic functional group containing at least one of a primary nitrogen atom and a secondary nitrogen atom, and has a weight average molecular weight of 90 to 400,000.
  • the cationic functional group is not particularly limited as long as it can be positively charged and contains at least one of a primary nitrogen atom and a secondary nitrogen atom.
  • the compound (A) may contain a tertiary nitrogen atom in addition to the primary nitrogen atom and the secondary nitrogen atom.
  • a "primary nitrogen atom” refers to a nitrogen atom that is bonded to only two hydrogen atoms and one atom other than hydrogen atoms (for example, nitrogen contained in a primary amino group ( -NH2 group)). or a nitrogen atom (cation) bonded to only three hydrogen atoms and one non-hydrogen atom.
  • “secondary nitrogen atom” refers to a nitrogen atom that is bonded to only one hydrogen atom and two atoms other than hydrogen atoms (i.e., a nitrogen atom contained in a functional group represented by the following formula (a)). ), or a nitrogen atom (cation) bonded only to two hydrogen atoms and two atoms other than hydrogen atoms.
  • a "tertiary nitrogen atom” refers to a nitrogen atom that is bonded to only three atoms other than hydrogen atoms (i.e., a nitrogen atom that is a functional group represented by the following formula (b)), or a hydrogen atom. Refers to a nitrogen atom (cation) that is bonded to only one and three atoms other than hydrogen atoms.
  • the functional group represented by the formula (a) may be a functional group that constitutes a part of a secondary amino group (-NHR a group; here, R a represents an alkyl group). However, it may also be a divalent linking group contained in the backbone of the polymer.
  • the functional group (i.e., tertiary nitrogen atom) represented by the formula (b) is a tertiary amino group (-NR b R c group; where R b and R c each independently represent an alkyl It may be a functional group constituting a part of (representing a group), or it may be a trivalent linking group contained in the skeleton of the polymer.
  • the weight average molecular weight of compound (A) is 90 or more and 400,000 or less.
  • the compound (A) include aliphatic amines, compounds having a siloxane bond (Si-O bond) and an amino group, and amine compounds having a ring structure without having an Si-O bond in the molecule. It will be done.
  • the weight average molecular weight is preferably 10,000 or more and 200,000 or less.
  • the compound (A) is a compound having a siloxane bond (Si-O bond) and an amino group
  • the weight average molecular weight is preferably 130 or more and 10,000 or less, more preferably 130 or more and 5,000 or less, and 130 or more. More preferably, it is 2000 or less.
  • the weight average molecular weight is preferably 90 or more and 600 or less.
  • the weight average molecular weight refers to the weight average molecular weight in terms of polyethylene glycol measured by GPC (Gel Permeation Chromatography) method for other than monomers. Specifically, the weight average molecular weight was determined using an aqueous solution with a sodium nitrate concentration of 0.1 mol/L as a developing solvent, an analyzer Shodex DET RI-101, and two types of analytical columns (TSKgel G6000PWXL-CP and TSKgel G3000PWXL- manufactured by Tosoh). CP) at a flow rate of 1.0 mL/min, and the refractive index is calculated using analysis software (Empower 3 manufactured by Waters) using polyethylene glycol/polyethylene oxide as a standard product.
  • GPC Gel Permeation Chromatography
  • the compound (A) may further have an anionic functional group, a nonionic functional group, etc. as necessary.
  • the nonionic functional group may be a hydrogen bond accepting group or a hydrogen bond donating group.
  • Examples of the nonionic functional group include a hydroxy group, a carbonyl group, an ether group (-O-), and the like.
  • the anionic functional group is not particularly limited as long as it can be negatively charged. Examples of the anionic functional group include a carboxylic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, and a sulfuric acid group.
  • Compound (A) includes aliphatic amines, more specifically ethyleneimine, propyleneimine, butyleneimine, pentyleneimine, hexyleneimine, heptyleneimine, octyleneimine, trimethyleneimine, tetramethyleneimine, Examples include polyalkyleneimine, which is a polymer of alkyleneimine such as pentamethyleneimine, hexamethyleneimine, and octamethyleneimine; polyallylamine; and polyacrylamide.
  • Polyethyleneimine (PEI) is produced by a known method described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 43-8828, Japanese Patent Publication No. 49-33120, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2001-213958, International Publication No. 2010/137711 pamphlet, etc. be able to.
  • Polyalkyleneimines other than polyethyleneimine can also be produced by the same method as polyethyleneimine.
  • the compound (A) is a derivative of the above-mentioned polyalkyleneimine (polyalkyleneimine derivative; particularly preferably polyethyleneimine derivative).
  • the polyalkylene imine derivative is not particularly limited as long as it is a compound that can be produced using the above polyalkylene imine.
  • polyalkyleneimine derivatives are obtained by introducing an alkyl group (preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms), an aryl group, etc. into polyalkyleneimine, and polyalkyleneimine derivatives obtained by introducing a crosslinkable group such as a hydroxyl group into polyalkyleneimine. Examples include polyalkyleneimine derivatives.
  • These polyalkylene imine derivatives can be produced by a conventional method using the above polyalkylene imine. Specifically, it can be produced, for example, in accordance with the method described in JP-A-6-016809.
  • polyalkylene imine derivative a highly branched polyalkylene imine obtained by increasing the degree of branching of the polyalkylene imine by reacting the polyalkylene imine with a monomer containing a cationic functional group is also preferable.
  • a polyalkylene imine having a plurality of secondary nitrogen atoms in its skeleton is reacted with a cationic functional group-containing monomer
  • the plurality of secondary nitrogen atoms are A method of substituting at least one of them with a cationic functional group-containing monomer, a method in which a polyalkylene imine having a plurality of primary nitrogen atoms at the terminal is reacted with a cationic functional group-containing monomer, and the plurality of primary nitrogen atoms Examples include a method of replacing at least one of them with a cationic functional group-containing monomer.
  • Examples of the cationic functional group introduced to improve the degree of branching include aminoethyl group, aminopropyl group, diaminopropyl group, aminobutyl group, diaminobutyl group, triaminobutyl group, etc.
  • An aminoethyl group is preferred from the viewpoint of reducing the functional group equivalent weight and increasing the cationic functional group density.
  • polyethyleneimine and its derivatives may be commercially available.
  • polyethyleneimine and its derivatives commercially available from Nippon Shokubai Co., Ltd., BASF, MP-Biomedicals, etc. can be appropriately selected and used.
  • Examples of the compound (A) include, in addition to the aforementioned aliphatic amines, compounds having an Si--O bond and an amino group.
  • Examples of the compound having an Si--O bond and an amino group include siloxane diamine, a silane coupling agent having an amino group, and a siloxane polymer of a silane coupling agent having an amino group.
  • Examples of the silane coupling agent having an amino group include a compound represented by the following formula (A-3).
  • R 1 represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • R 2 and R 3 each independently represent an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, an ether group, or a carbonyl group, which may be substituted (the skeleton may contain a carbonyl group, ether group, etc.).
  • R 4 and R 5 each independently represent an optionally substituted alkylene group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms or a single bond.
  • Ar represents a divalent or trivalent aromatic ring.
  • X 1 represents hydrogen or an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
  • X 2 represents hydrogen, a cycloalkyl group, a heterocyclic group, an aryl group, or an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms (the skeleton may include a carbonyl group, an ether group, etc.).
  • a plurality of R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , and X 1 may be the same or different.
  • Substituents for the alkyl group and alkylene group in R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , X 1 , and X 2 each independently include an amino group, a hydroxy group, an alkoxy group, a cyano group, and a carboxylic acid group.
  • Examples of the divalent or trivalent aromatic ring in Ar include a divalent or trivalent benzene ring.
  • Examples of the aryl group for X 2 include phenyl group, methylbenzyl group, vinylbenzyl group, and the like.
  • silane coupling agent represented by formula (A-3) include N-(2-aminoethyl)-3-aminopropylmethyldiethoxysilane, N-(2-aminoethyl)-3 -Aminopropyltriethoxysilane, N-(2-aminoethyl)-3-aminoisobutyldimethylmethoxysilane, N-(2-aminoethyl)-3-aminoisobutylmethyldimethoxysilane, N-(2-aminoethyl)- 11-aminoundecyltrimethoxysilane, 3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-aminopropyltriethoxysilane, N-phenyl-3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, (aminoethylaminoethyl)phenyltriethoxysilane, methylbenzyl Aminoethyla
  • silane coupling agent containing an amino group other than formula (A-3) examples include N,N-bis[3-(trimethoxysilyl)propyl]ethylenediamine, N,N'-bis[3-(trimethoxysilyl)propyl] silyl)propyl]ethylenediamine, bis[(3-triethoxysilyl)propyl]amine, piperazinylpropylmethyldimethoxysilane, bis[3-(triethoxysilyl)propyl]urea, bis(methyldiethoxysilylpropyl)amine, 2,2-dimethoxy-1,6-diaza-2-silacyclooctane, 3,5-diamino-N-(4-(methoxydimethylsilyl)phenyl)benzamide, 3,5-diamino-N-(4-( Examples include triethoxysilyl)phenyl)benzamide, 5-(ethoxydimethylsilyl)benzen
  • silane coupling agents having an amino group may be used alone or in combination of two or more. Furthermore, a silane coupling agent having an amino group and a silane coupling agent not having an amino group may be used in combination. For example, a silane coupling agent having a mercapto group may be used to improve adhesion to metals.
  • a polymer (siloxane polymer) formed from these silane coupling agents via a siloxane bond may be used.
  • Si-O-Si siloxane polymer
  • a polymer having a linear siloxane structure, a polymer having a branched siloxane structure, a polymer having a cyclic siloxane structure, a polymer having a cage-shaped siloxane structure, etc. is obtained from the hydrolyzate of 3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane.
  • a polymer having a linear siloxane structure, a polymer having a branched siloxane structure, a polymer having a cyclic siloxane structure, a polymer having a cage-shaped siloxane structure, etc. is obtained from the hydrolyzate of 3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane.
  • Examples of the siloxane diamine include a compound represented by the following formula (A-2).
  • i is an integer of 0 to 4
  • j is an integer of 1 to 3
  • Me is a methyl group.
  • Examples of the compound (A) include, in addition to the aforementioned aliphatic amines and compounds having an Si-O bond and an amino group, amine compounds that do not have a Si-O bond in the molecule and have a ring structure. .
  • amine compounds having a ring structure and having a weight average molecular weight of 90 or more and 600 or less are preferred, and do not have a Si--O bond in the molecule.
  • Examples of the amine compound having a ring structure and having a weight average molecular weight of 90 or more and 600 or less without having an Si--O bond in the molecule include alicyclic amines, aromatic ring amines, heterocyclic amines, and the like.
  • the molecule may have multiple ring structures, and the multiple ring structures may be the same or different.
  • a compound having an aromatic ring is more preferable because a more thermally stable compound is easily obtained.
  • an amine compound having a ring structure and having a weight average molecular weight of 90 or more and 600 or less, which does not have a Si-O bond in the molecule it may form a thermally crosslinked structure such as amide, amide-imide, or imide together with the crosslinking agent (B).
  • Compounds having a primary amino group are preferred because they are easy to use and can improve heat resistance.
  • two primary amino groups are used because it is easy to increase the number of thermally crosslinked structures such as amide, amide-imide, imide, etc. together with the crosslinking agent (B), and the heat resistance can be further improved.
  • Diamine compounds having three primary amino groups, triamine compounds having three primary amino groups, and the like are preferred.
  • Examples of the alicyclic amine include cyclohexylamine and dimethylaminocyclohexane.
  • Examples of aromatic ring amines include diaminodiphenyl ether, xylene diamine (preferably paraxylene diamine), diaminobenzene, diaminotoluene, methylene dianiline, dimethyldiaminobiphenyl, bis(trifluoromethyl)diaminobiphenyl, diaminobenzophenone, and diaminobenzanilide.
  • the heterocycle of the heterocyclic amine includes a heterocycle containing a sulfur atom as a heteroatom (for example, a thiophene ring), or a heterocycle containing a nitrogen atom as a heteroatom (for example, a pyrrole ring, a pyrrolidine ring, a pyrazole ring, an imidazole ring).
  • a heterocycle containing a sulfur atom as a heteroatom for example, a thiophene ring
  • a heterocycle containing a nitrogen atom as a heteroatom for example, a pyrrole ring, a pyrrolidine ring, a pyrazole ring, an imidazole ring.
  • 5-membered rings such as triazole ring
  • 6-membered rings such as isocyanuric ring, pyridine ring, pyridazine ring, pyrimidine ring, pyrazine ring, piperidine ring, piperazine ring, triazine ring
  • indole ring indoline ring, quinoline ring, acridine ring, fused rings such as a naphthyridine ring, a quinazoline ring, a purine ring, a quinoxaline ring, etc.
  • examples of the heterocyclic amine having a nitrogen-containing heterocycle include melamine, ammeline, melam, melem, tris(4-aminophenyl)amine, and the like.
  • examples of amine compounds having both a heterocycle and an aromatic ring include N2,N4,N6-tris(4-aminophenyl)-1,3,5-triazine-2,4,6-triamine.
  • the compound (A) Since the compound (A) has a primary or secondary amino group, it does not interact with functional groups such as hydroxyl groups, epoxy groups, carboxy groups, amino groups, and mercapto groups that may exist on the surfaces of the first substrate and the second substrate.
  • the substrates can be strongly bonded to each other by electrical interaction or by forming a close covalent bond with the functional group.
  • the compound (A) since the compound (A) has a primary or secondary amino group, it easily dissolves in the polar solvent (D) described below.
  • a compound (A) that is easily soluble in a polar solvent (D) it has a high affinity with the hydrophilic surface of a substrate such as a silicon substrate, making it easier to form a smooth film and making it easier to form a smooth film. And the thickness of the second resin layer can be reduced.
  • an aliphatic amine or a compound having an Si-O bond and an amino group is preferable, and from the viewpoint of heat resistance, a compound having an Si-O bond and an amino group is preferable. More preferred.
  • the ratio of the total number of primary nitrogen atoms and secondary nitrogen atoms to the number of silicon atoms in the compound (A) is 0.2 or more and 5 or less from the viewpoint of forming a smooth thin film.
  • the compound (A) contains a compound having an Si-O bond and an amino group
  • the methyl group bonded to Si in the compound having an Si-O bond and an amino group is It is preferable that the molar ratio of non-crosslinkable groups such as (non-crosslinkable group)/Si ⁇ 2 is satisfied.
  • the density of crosslinking (crosslinking between Si-O-Si bonds and amide bonds, imide bonds, etc.) of the formed film increases, the substrates have sufficient adhesive strength, and the substrates can be peeled off. It is assumed that this can be suppressed.
  • compound (A) has a cationic functional group containing at least one of a primary nitrogen atom and a secondary nitrogen atom.
  • the proportion of the primary nitrogen atom in the total nitrogen atoms in the compound (A) is preferably 20 mol% or more, and 25 mol% It is more preferable that it is above, and even more preferable that it is 30 mol% or more.
  • the compound (A) may have a cationic functional group that contains a primary nitrogen atom and does not contain any nitrogen atoms other than the primary nitrogen atom (e.g., a secondary nitrogen atom, a tertiary nitrogen atom). good.
  • the proportion of the secondary nitrogen atom in the total nitrogen atoms in the compound (A) is preferably 5 mol% or more and 50 mol% or less, More preferably, it is 10 mol% or more and 45 mol% or less.
  • the compound (A) may contain a tertiary nitrogen atom in addition to the primary nitrogen atom and the secondary nitrogen atom, and when the compound (A) contains a tertiary nitrogen atom, the compound (A)
  • the proportion of tertiary nitrogen atoms in the total nitrogen atoms in the carbon fiber is preferably 20 mol% or more and 50 mol% or less, and more preferably 25 mol% or more and 45 mol% or less.
  • the content of the component derived from the compound (A) in the first resin layer or the second resin layer is not particularly limited, and for example, the content of the component derived from the compound (A) in the first resin layer or the second resin layer is not particularly limited.
  • the content can be 1% by mass or more and 82% by mass or less, preferably 5% by mass or more and 82% by mass or less, and more preferably 13% by mass or more and 82% by mass or less.
  • the crosslinking agent (B) is a compound with a weight average molecular weight of 200 or more and 2000 or less.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the crosslinking agent (B) is preferably 200 or more and 1000 or less, more preferably 200 or more and 600 or less, and even more preferably 200 or more and 400 or less.
  • the crosslinking agent (B) has a ring structure within the molecule.
  • the ring structure include an alicyclic structure and an aromatic ring structure.
  • the crosslinking agent (B) may have a plurality of ring structures within the molecule, and the plurality of ring structures may be the same or different.
  • the alicyclic structure examples include an alicyclic structure having 3 to 8 carbon atoms, preferably an alicyclic structure having 4 to 6 carbon atoms, and the ring structure may be saturated or unsaturated. good. More specifically, the alicyclic structure includes saturated alicyclic structures such as a cyclopropane ring, a cyclobutane ring, a cyclopentane ring, a cyclohexane ring, a cycloheptane ring, and a cyclooctane ring; a cyclopropene ring, a cyclobutene ring, a cyclopentene ring, Examples include unsaturated alicyclic structures such as a cyclohexene ring, a cycloheptene ring, and a cyclooctene ring.
  • the aromatic ring structure is not particularly limited as long as it exhibits aromaticity, and examples include benzene-based aromatic rings such as benzene ring, naphthalene ring, anthracene ring, and perylene ring, aromatic rings such as pyridine ring, and thiophene ring. Examples include non-benzene aromatic rings such as heterocycles, indene rings, and azulene rings.
  • the ring structure that the crosslinking agent (B) has in its molecule is preferably at least one selected from the group consisting of a cyclobutane ring, a cyclopentane ring, a cyclohexane ring, a benzene ring, and a naphthalene ring. At least one of a benzene ring and a naphthalene ring is more preferred in terms of further improving the heat resistance of the second resin layer.
  • the crosslinking agent (B) may have a plurality of ring structures in its molecule, and when the ring structure is benzene, it may have a biphenyl structure, a benzophenone structure, a diphenyl ether structure, etc.
  • the crosslinking agent (B) preferably has a fluorine atom in the molecule, more preferably has 1 to 6 fluorine atoms in the molecule, and has 3 to 6 fluorine atoms in the molecule. It is further preferable to have.
  • the crosslinking agent (B) may have a fluoroalkyl group in the molecule, specifically, a trifluoroalkyl group or a hexafluoroisopropyl group.
  • carboxylic acid compounds such as alicyclic carboxylic acid, benzene carboxylic acid, naphthalene carboxylic acid, diphthalic acid, and fluorinated aromatic ring carboxylic acid
  • alicyclic carboxylic acid ester, benzene carboxylic acid ester, naphthalene carboxylic acid examples include carboxylic acid ester compounds such as carboxylic acid ester, diphthalic acid ester, and fluorinated aromatic ring carboxylic acid ester.
  • the crosslinking agent (B) is a carboxylic acid ester compound, aggregation due to association between the compound (A) and the crosslinking agent (B) is suppressed, aggregates and pits are reduced, and film thickness can be adjusted. becomes easier.
  • X is a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group
  • a butyl group is preferable, but an ethyl group or a propyl group is preferable from the viewpoint of further suppressing aggregation due to association between the compound (A) and the crosslinking agent (B).
  • carboxylic acid compound examples include, but are not limited to, 1,2,3,4-cyclobutanetetracarboxylic acid, 1,2,3,4-cyclopentanetetracarboxylic acid, and 1,3,5-cyclohexane.
  • Alicyclic carboxylic acids such as tricarboxylic acid, 1,2,4-cyclohexanetricarboxylic acid, 1,2,4,5-cyclohexanetetracarboxylic acid, 1,2,3,4,5,6-cyclohexanehexacarboxylic acid; 1 , 2,4-benzenetricarboxylic acid, 1,3,5-benzenetricarboxylic acid, pyromellitic acid, 3,4'-biphthalic acid, P-phenylenebis(trimellitate acid), benzenepentacarboxylic acid, mellitic acid, etc.
  • Carboxylic acids Naphthalenecarboxylic acids such as 1,4,5,8-naphthalenetetracarboxylic acid and 2,3,6,7-naphthalenetetracarboxylic acid; 3,3',5,5'-tetracarboxydiphenylmethane, biphenyl- 3,3',5,5'-tetracarboxylic acid, biphenyl-3,4',5-tricarboxylic acid, biphenyl-3,3',4,4'-tetracarboxylic acid, benzophenone-3,3',4 , 4'-tetracarboxylic acid, 4,4'-oxydiphthalic acid, 3,4'-oxydiphthalic acid, 1,3-bis(phthalic acid)tetramethyldisiloxane, 4,4'-(ethyne-1,2- 4,4'-(Ethyne-1,2-diyl)diphthalic acid, 4,4'-(1,4-phenylenebis(oxy)
  • carboxylic acid ester compounds include compounds in which at least one carboxy group in the specific examples of the carboxylic acid compounds described above is substituted with an ester group.
  • carboxylic acid ester compound include half-esterified compounds represented by the following general formulas (B-1) to (B-5).
  • R in general formulas (B-1) to (B-5) each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 or more and 6 or less carbon atoms, and among them, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group are preferable, and an ethyl group, Propyl group is more preferred.
  • a half-esterified compound can be produced, for example, by mixing a carboxylic acid anhydride, which is an anhydride of the aforementioned carboxylic acid compound, with an alcohol solvent and ring-opening the carboxylic acid anhydride.
  • the content of the component derived from the crosslinking agent (B) in the first resin layer and the second resin layer is not particularly limited, and for example, the content of the component derived from the compound (A) is
  • Y represents an imide-bridged or amide-bridged nitrogen atom, OH, or an ester group.
  • a resin composition containing a resin material may be applied onto the surface of at least one of the first substrate and the second substrate.
  • the resin composition containing the resin material preferably contains a polar solvent (D) together with the resin materials such as the above-mentioned compound (A) and crosslinking agent (B).
  • the polar solvent (D) refers to a solvent having a dielectric constant of 5 or more at room temperature.
  • the polar solvent (D) include protic inorganic compounds such as water and heavy water; methanol, ethanol, 1-propanol, 2-propanol, 1-butanol, 2-butanol, isobutyl alcohol, isopentyl alcohol, Alcohols such as cyclohexanol, ethylene glycol, propylene glycol, 2-methoxyethanol, 2-ethoxyethanol, benzyl alcohol, diethylene glycol, triethylene glycol, glycerin; Ethers such as tetrahydrofuran and dimethoxyethane; furfural, acetone, ethyl methyl ketone , aldehydes and ketones such as cyclohexane; acetic anhydride, ethyl acetate, butyl acetate, ethylene carbonate, propylene carbonate, formaldehyde, N-methylformamide, N,N-dimethylformamide, N-methylacetamide, N,N-d
  • the polar solvent (D) preferably includes a protic solvent, more preferably includes water, and even more preferably includes ultrapure water.
  • the content of the polar solvent (D) in the resin composition is not particularly limited, and is, for example, 1.0% by mass or more and 99.99896% by mass or less, and 40% by mass or more and 99.9% by mass or less based on the entire resin composition. It is preferably 99896% by mass or less.
  • the boiling point of the polar solvent (D) is such that the polar solvent (D) is volatilized by heating when forming the first resin layer and the second resin layer, and In terms of reducing the amount of residual solvent, the temperature is preferably 150°C or lower, more preferably 120°C or lower.
  • the resin composition containing the resin material may contain an additive (C) in addition to the above-mentioned compound (A), the resin material such as the crosslinking agent (B), the polar solvent (D), and the like.
  • an acid having a carboxyl group and having a weight average molecular weight of 46 to 195 (C-1), a base having a nitrogen atom and having a weight average molecular weight of 17 to 120 and not having a ring structure (C-2) can be mentioned.
  • the additive (C) is vaporized by heating when forming the first resin layer and the second resin layer, the first resin layer and the second resin layer in the substrate laminate of the present disclosure are , an additive (C) may be included.
  • the acid (C-1) is an acid having a weight average molecular weight of 46 or more and 195 or less and having a carboxy group.
  • the acid (C-1) as the additive (C)
  • the amino group in the compound (A) and the carboxy group in the acid (C-1) form an ionic bond, resulting in crosslinking with the compound (A). It is presumed that aggregation due to association with agent (B) is suppressed.
  • the interaction between the ammonium ion derived from the amino group in compound (A) and the carboxylate ion derived from the carboxy group in acid (C-1) is stronger than the interaction between the ammonium ion derived from the amino group in the crosslinking agent (B) and the carboxylate ion derived from the carboxy group in the crosslinking agent (B), so it is presumed that aggregation is suppressed.
  • the present invention is not limited in any way by the above speculation.
  • the acid (C-1) is not particularly limited as long as it has a carboxy group and has a weight average molecular weight of 46 or more and 195 or less, and examples thereof include monocarboxylic acid compounds, dicarboxylic acid compounds, oxydicarboxylic acid compounds, etc. . More specifically, the acid (C-1) includes formic acid, acetic acid, malonic acid, oxalic acid, citric acid, benzoic acid, lactic acid, glycolic acid, glyceric acid, butyric acid, methoxyacetic acid, ethoxyacetic acid, phthalic acid, Examples include terephthalic acid, picolinic acid, salicylic acid, and 3,4,5-trihydroxybenzoic acid.
  • the content of the acid (C-1) in the resin composition containing the resin material is not particularly limited, and for example, the content of the acid (C-1) relative to the total number of nitrogen atoms in the compound (A) is
  • the ratio of the number of carboxy groups (COOH/N) is preferably 0.01 or more and 10 or less, more preferably 0.02 or more and 6 or less, and even more preferably 0.5 or more and 3 or less.
  • the base (C-2) is a base having a nitrogen atom and having a weight average molecular weight of 17 or more and 120 or less.
  • the resin composition containing the resin material includes a base (C-2) as an additive (C), so that the carboxy group in the crosslinking agent (B) and the amino group in the base (C-2) form an ionic bond. It is presumed that by doing so, aggregation due to association between compound (A) and crosslinking agent (B) is suppressed. More specifically, the interaction between the carboxylate ion derived from the carboxy group in the crosslinking agent (B) and the ammonium ion derived from the amino group in the base (C-2) is derived from the amino group in the compound (A).
  • the base (C-2) is not particularly limited as long as it has a nitrogen atom and has a weight average molecular weight of 17 or more and 120 or less and does not have a ring structure, and includes monoamine compounds, diamine compounds, and the like. More specifically, the base (C-2) includes ammonia, ethylamine, ethanolamine, diethylamine, triethylamine, ethylenediamine, N-acetylethylenediamine, N-(2-aminoethyl)ethanolamine, N-(2-aminoethyl)ethanolamine, and N-(2-aminoethyl)ethanolamine. Examples include ethyl)glycine.
  • the content of the base (C-2) in the resin composition containing the resin material is not particularly limited, and for example, the content of the base (C-2) relative to the number of carboxy groups in the crosslinking agent (B) is
  • the ratio of the number of nitrogen atoms (N/COOH) is preferably 0.5 or more and 5 or less, more preferably 0.9 or more and 3 or less.
  • tetraethoxysilane When insulation properties are required for the first resin layer and the second resin layer of the substrate laminate of the present disclosure, tetraethoxysilane, tetramethoxysilane, bistriethoxysilylethane, bistriethoxysilylethane, bistriethoxysilane, bistriethoxysilane, bistriethoxysilane, bistriethoxysilane, bistriethoxysilane, etc.
  • Ethoxysilylmethane bis(methyldiethoxysilyl)ethane, 1,1,3,3,5,5-hexaethoxy-1,3,5-trisilacyclohexane, 1,3,5,7-tetramethyl-1 , 3,5,7-tetrahydroxylcyclosiloxane, 1,1,4,4-tetramethyl-1,4-diethoxydisylethylene, 1,3,5-trimethyl-1,3,5-trimethyl-1 , 3,5-triethoxy-1,3,5-trisilacyclohexane may be mixed. Furthermore, methyltriethoxysilane, dimethyldiethoxysilane, trimethylethoxysilane, etc. may be mixed in order to improve the hydrophobicity of the first resin layer and the second resin layer having insulating properties. These compounds may be mixed to control etching selectivity.
  • the resin composition containing the resin material may contain a solvent other than the polar solvent (D), such as normal hexane.
  • the resin composition containing the resin material may contain phthalic acid, benzoic acid, etc., or derivatives thereof, for example, to improve electrical characteristics. Further, the resin composition containing the resin material may contain benzotriazole or a derivative thereof, for example, in order to suppress corrosion of copper.
  • the pH of the resin composition containing the resin material is not particularly limited, and is preferably 2.0 or more and 12.0 or less.
  • acid (C-1) is used as additive (C)
  • crosslinking agent (B) when compound (A) and crosslinking agent (B) are mixed, cloudiness and gelation of the resin composition containing the resin material (if gelation occurs, it may take time for the resin composition to become transparent; undesirable) can be suitably suppressed.
  • the base (C-2) as the additive (C)
  • compound (A) and crosslinking agent (B) are mixed, cloudiness and gelation of the resin composition containing the resin material (if gelation occurs, it may take time for the resin composition to become transparent; undesirable) can be suitably suppressed.
  • Examples of methods for applying the resin material on the surface of at least one of the first substrate and the second substrate include vapor deposition polymerization, CVD (chemical vapor deposition), and ALD (atomic layer deposition).
  • Application methods include a film method, a dipping method, a spray method, a spin coating method, and a bar coating method.
  • a resin composition containing the above-mentioned resin material For example, when forming a film with a micron-sized film thickness, it is preferable to use a bar coating method, and when forming a film with a nano-sized film thickness (several nanometers to several hundred nanometers), a spin coating method is used. It is preferable. Note that the film thickness of the resin material may be adjusted as appropriate depending on the intended thickness of the first resin layer and the second resin layer.
  • the method of applying the resin material by spin coating is not particularly limited, and for example, a resin composition containing the resin material is dripped onto the surface of the first substrate while rotating the first substrate with a spin coater. Then, a method can be used in which the first substrate is dried by increasing the number of rotations.
  • a resin material by spin coating there are no particular restrictions on various conditions such as the number of rotations of the substrate, the amount and time of dropping the resin composition containing the resin material, and the number of rotations of the substrate during drying. It may be adjusted as appropriate while considering the thickness of the resin material used.
  • the substrate to which the resin material has been applied may be cleaned in order to remove the excess resin material applied.
  • the cleaning method include wet cleaning using a rinsing liquid such as a polar solvent, plasma cleaning, and the like.
  • step A includes curing the resin material applied to one surface of the first substrate and one surface of the second substrate to form the first resin layer and the second substrate.
  • the method may include a step of forming a resin layer.
  • the first resin layer and the second resin layer are formed by curing the resin material by heating or the like.
  • the resin material contains a thermosetting compound, it is cured by heating the resin material at a temperature equal to or higher than the curing temperature.
  • the resin material applied to one surface of the first substrate and one surface of the second substrate is cured by heating at 100° C. to 450° C.
  • the above-mentioned temperature refers to the temperature of the surface of the resin material applied to the surface.
  • the solvent in the resin composition containing the resin material is removed.
  • components in the resin material react to obtain a cured product, and a first resin layer and a second resin layer containing the cured product are formed.
  • the temperature is preferably 150°C to 450°C, more preferably 180°C to 400°C, even more preferably 180°C to 250°C, and even more preferably 180°C to 200°C, from the viewpoint of suppressing heat damage to devices such as semiconductor memories. C is particularly preferred.
  • the absolute pressure is more preferably at least 1000 Pa and at most atmospheric pressure, even more preferably at least 5000 Pa and at most atmospheric pressure, particularly preferably at least 10000 Pa and at most atmospheric pressure.
  • the resin material applied to the surface can be heated by a conventional method using a furnace or a hot plate.
  • a furnace for example, SPX-1120 manufactured by Apex Corporation, VF-1000LP manufactured by Koyo Thermo Systems Co., Ltd., etc. can be used.
  • the heating of the resin material applied to the surface may be performed in an atmospheric atmosphere or in an inert gas (nitrogen gas, argon gas, helium gas, etc.) atmosphere.
  • the heating time of the resin material applied to the surface is not particularly limited, and is, for example, 3 hours or less, preferably 1 hour or less. There is no particular restriction on the lower limit of the heating time, and it can be set to, for example, 5 minutes.
  • the resin material applied to the surface may be irradiated with ultraviolet (UV) light.
  • UV light ultraviolet light with a wavelength of 170 nm to 230 nm, excimer light with a wavelength of 222 nm, excimer light with a wavelength of 172 nm, etc. are preferable.
  • Whether the resin material is cured or not can be confirmed by, for example, measuring the peak intensity of specific bonds and structures using FT-IR (Fourier transform infrared spectroscopy).
  • Specific bonds and structures include bonds and structures generated by crosslinking reactions. For example, when amide bonds, imide bonds, siloxane bonds, tetrahydronaphthalene structures, oxazole ring structures, etc. are formed, it can be determined that the resin material is cured, and the peak intensities derived from these bonds, structures, etc. are measured by FT - You can confirm by measuring with IR.
  • the amide bond can be confirmed by the presence of vibrational peaks at about 1650 cm ⁇ 1 and about 1520 cm ⁇ 1 .
  • Imide bonds can be confirmed by the presence of vibrational peaks at about 1770 cm ⁇ 1 and about 1720 cm ⁇ 1 .
  • Siloxane bonds can be confirmed by the presence of vibrational peaks between 1000 cm ⁇ 1 and 1080 cm ⁇ 1 .
  • the tetrahydronaphthalene structure can be confirmed by the presence of vibrational peaks between 1500 cm ⁇ 1 .
  • the oxazole ring structure can be confirmed by the presence of vibrational peaks at about 1625 cm ⁇ 1 and about 1460 cm ⁇ 1 .
  • At least one of the first resin layer and the second resin layer formed by curing the resin material has at least one selected from the group consisting of a siloxane bond, an ester bond, an ether bond, an amide bond, and an imide bond. It is more preferable to have a siloxane bond and an imide bond.
  • the first resin layer and the second resin layer formed by curing the resin material each have a content of sodium and potassium of 10 mass ppb or less on an elemental basis. If the content of sodium or potassium is 10 mass ppb or less on an elemental basis, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconveniences in the electrical characteristics of the semiconductor device, such as malfunction of the transistor.
  • the amount of silicon on the surfaces of the first resin layer and the second resin layer is preferably 20 atom % or less, more preferably 15 atom % or less, and 10 atom % or less, each independently. is even more preferable.
  • the amount of silicon on the surface of the resin layer can be evaluated by measuring the atomic ratio using an X-ray photoelectron spectrometer (XPS). Specifically, using XPS AXIS-NOVA (manufactured by KRATOS), the atomic ratio is measured from the peak intensity of the narrow spectrum when the total amount of each element detected in the wide spectrum is taken as 100%. be able to.
  • the thickness of the first resin layer and the second resin layer is preferably 0.001 ⁇ m to 8.0 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.01 ⁇ m to 6.0 ⁇ m, and 0.03 ⁇ m. More preferably, the thickness is 5.0 ⁇ m.
  • the thickness of the first resin layer and the second resin layer is 0.001 ⁇ m or more, the bonding strength with the second inorganic material layer, other layers, etc. can be increased.
  • the thickness of the first resin layer and the second resin layer is 8.0 ⁇ m or less, variations in the thickness of the resin layer can be suppressed when the resin layer is formed on a large-area substrate.
  • the thickness of the first resin layer and the second resin layer is the same as that of the second resin layer. From the viewpoint of improving the bonding strength with the equipment layer, other layers, etc. and suppressing variations in the thickness of the first resin layer and the second resin layer, it is preferably 0.01 ⁇ m to 8.0 ⁇ m, and 0.01 ⁇ m to 8.0 ⁇ m. It is more preferably 0.03 ⁇ m to 6.0 ⁇ m, and even more preferably 0.05 ⁇ m to 5.0 ⁇ m.
  • the thickness of the first resin layer and the second resin layer is the same as that of the second inorganic material layer and the other layers. From the viewpoint of improving the bonding strength with the like and suppressing variations in the thickness of the first resin layer and the second resin layer, it is preferably 0.001 ⁇ m or more and less than 1.0 ⁇ m, and 0.01 ⁇ m to 0.8 ⁇ m. More preferably, it is 0.03 ⁇ m to 0.6 ⁇ m.
  • the first resin layer facilitates temporarily fixing the first resin layer and the second inorganic material layer, which will be described later, at a low temperature, and also allows the first laminate and the second laminate in the substrate laminate to be easily fixed together.
  • at least one functional group selected from the group consisting of functional groups having a bond and from the viewpoint of heat resistance, it is even more preferable to have a silanol group.
  • These functional groups may be formed by surface treatment after forming the first resin layer, or may be formed by treatment with a silane coupling agent or the like. Alternatively, compounds containing these functional groups may be mixed into the resin composition.
  • the second resin layer may have the above-mentioned functional group capable of forming a chemical bond on the surface of the second resin layer.
  • Whether or not the surface of the resin layer has Si-OH groups can be evaluated by surface analysis of the resin layer using time-of-flight secondary ion mass spectrometry (TOF-SIMS). Specifically, using PHI nanoTOFII (ULVAC-PHI Co., Ltd.), which is a TOF-SIMS, it was determined whether the surface of the resin layer had Si-OH groups based on the presence or absence of a peak at a mass-to-charge ratio (m/Z) of 45. can be evaluated.
  • TOF-SIMS time-of-flight secondary ion mass spectrometry
  • the surface of at least one of the first resin layer and the second resin layer may be flattened.
  • the flattening method include a fly cut method, chemical mechanical polishing (CMP), and the like.
  • CMP chemical mechanical polishing
  • one method may be used alone, or two or more methods may be used in combination.
  • the surface of at least one of the first resin layer and the second resin layer may be washed.
  • the cleaning method include wet cleaning using a rinsing liquid and dry cleaning using plasma or the like.
  • wet cleaning include ultrasonic cleaning using pure water, spin cleaning using a solvent such as NMP, and the like.
  • the first inorganic material layer is a layer disposed on the other surface of the first substrate, and the second inorganic material layer is a layer disposed on the other surface of the second substrate.
  • the first inorganic material layer may be formed on the other surface of the first substrate;
  • the first resin layer may be formed after forming the equipment layer.
  • the order in which the second resin layer and the second inorganic material layer are formed is not particularly limited.
  • the materials of the first inorganic layer and the second inorganic layer are not particularly limited, and may be any inorganic material that is used when bonding inorganic materials in a semiconductor substrate, for example.
  • the first inorganic material layer and the second inorganic material layer each independently include Si, Al, Ti, Zr, Hf, Fe, Ni, Cu, Ag, Au, Ga, Ge, Sn, It may contain at least one element selected from the group consisting of Pd, As, Pt, Mg, In, Ta and Nb, and at least one element selected from the group consisting of Si, Ga, Ge and As. It is preferable to include.
  • the first inorganic layer and the second inorganic layer may contain oxides, carbides, nitrides, etc. of the above-mentioned elements.
  • the materials of the first inorganic layer and the second inorganic layer may be the same or different.
  • the method for forming the inorganic layer on the surface of the substrate is not particularly limited, and includes conventionally known methods for forming an inorganic layer. Examples include CVD, sputtering, AGD (aerosolized gas deposition), sol-gel method, anodizing treatment, thermal decomposition method, and the like.
  • the first laminate may include an electrode on a portion of the surface of the first resin layer and a portion of the surface of the first inorganic layer
  • the second laminate may include an electrode on a portion of the surface of the first resin layer and a portion of the surface of the first inorganic layer.
  • An electrode may be provided on a part of the surface of the second inorganic material layer and a part of the surface of the second inorganic material layer.
  • each electrode is arranged so that the electrode provided on the first resin layer side is in contact with the electrode provided on the second inorganic material layer.
  • a through hole is provided in the first laminate from the surface on the first resin layer side to the surface on the first inorganic material layer side, and an electrode passing through the first laminate is provided in the through hole. You can leave it there.
  • a through hole is provided in the second laminate from the surface on the second resin layer side to the surface on the second inorganic material layer side, and an electrode passing through the second laminate is provided in the through hole. You can leave it there.
  • the material of the electrode is not particularly limited, and conventionally known electrode materials may be used. Specific examples include copper, solder, tin, gold, silver, aluminum, indium, cobalt, and tungsten.
  • the method of providing electrodes on the first laminate and the second laminate is not particularly limited, and conventionally known methods can be employed.
  • an electrode may be formed on the surface to which the resin material is applied before the first resin layer is formed, and an electrode may be formed on the surface to which the resin material is applied before the first resin layer is formed.
  • An electrode may be formed on the surface on which is formed.
  • an electrode may be formed on the surface on which the inorganic layer is formed before the first inorganic layer is formed; An electrode may be formed on the surface on which the inorganic material layer is formed. The same applies to the second laminate.
  • the electrode may be formed in a convex shape on the surface of the first substrate or the second substrate, or may be formed penetrating the first substrate or the second substrate. It may be formed embedded in the substrate or the second substrate.
  • the structure includes an electrode on a part of the surface.
  • methods for removing the resin layer or inorganic layer on the current-carrying layer include fly-cutting, chemical mechanical polishing (CMP), and plasma dry etching.
  • CMP chemical mechanical polishing
  • plasma dry etching As for the removal method, one method may be used alone, or two or more methods may be used in combination.
  • a surface planer DFS8910 (manufactured by DISCO Co., Ltd.)) or the like can be used.
  • the slurry may be, for example, a slurry containing silica or alumina, which is generally used for polishing resins, or a slurry containing hydrogen peroxide and silica, which is used for polishing metals. good.
  • plasma dry etching fluorocarbon plasma, oxygen plasma, etc. may be used.
  • the oxide on the electrode surface may be reduced if necessary.
  • reduction treatment methods include a method of heating the substrate at 100° C. to 300° C. in an acid atmosphere such as formic acid, a method of heating the substrate in a hydrogen atmosphere, and the like. These treatments may be performed simultaneously with Step C, which will be described later.
  • the electrode is placed on the surface of the substrate on which the resin layer is formed or on the surface of the substrate on which the inorganic material layer is formed. It is also possible to form a hole in which is formed using a known method, and then form an electrode in the formed hole. Examples of methods for forming the holes include dry etching using gas, laser ablation, and the like.
  • Examples of methods for forming the electrodes include electroplating, electroless plating, sputtering, and inkjet methods.
  • holes in which electrodes are formed may be formed by photolithography in the resin material applied to at least one of the first substrate and the second substrate. After the resin material is cured to form at least one of the first resin layer and the second resin layer, electrodes may be formed in the formed holes.
  • the first laminate and the second laminate may be laminates separated into individual pieces by performing a dicing process, if necessary.
  • a dicer DAD6340 (manufactured by DISCO Corporation) or the like can be used.
  • the method for manufacturing a substrate laminate of the present disclosure includes contacting the first resin layer of the first laminate and the second inorganic material layer of the second laminate to form the first laminate and the second laminate. It includes step B of laminating the bodies.
  • step B before joining the first laminate and the second laminate via the first resin layer and the second inorganic material layer in step C, which will be described later, the first resin layer and the second laminate are bonded together.
  • step B is the step of bringing the inorganic material layer into contact with the inorganic material layer.
  • the first laminate and the second laminate are brought into contact so that a desired positional relationship is achieved when the first laminate and the second laminate are joined.
  • the electrode provided on the first resin layer comes into contact with the electrode provided on the second inorganic material layer. It is preferable that the first laminate and the second laminate are brought into contact with each other so that the first laminate and the second laminate are brought into contact with each other.
  • the curing rate of the first resin layer is preferably 70% or more and 100% or less.
  • the first laminate and the second laminate are firmly bonded in Step C, which will be described later, and there is a tendency for bonding positional deviation (alignment deviation) to be less likely to occur.
  • the curing rate of the first resin layer is more preferably 80% or more, even more preferably 85% or more, particularly preferably 90% or more, and even more preferably 93% or more. . Further, the curing rate of the first resin layer may be 100%, 99% or less, 95% or less, or 90% or less. Moreover, the preferable range of the curing rate of the second resin layer is the same as the preferable range of the curing rate of the first resin layer.
  • the curing rate of the second resin layer may be the curing rate before contacting with another layer (for example, another inorganic material layer).
  • the curing rate of (on the other hand) is more preferably 80% or more, even more preferably 85% or more, particularly preferably 90% or more, and even more preferably 93% or more.
  • Curing rate of a resin layer (at least one of the first resin layer and the second resin layer) containing a siloxane bond and at least one selected from the group consisting of an ester bond, an ether bond, an amide bond, and an imide bond is more preferably 80% or more, even more preferably 85% or more, particularly preferably 90% or more, and even more preferably 93% or more.
  • the curing rate of the first resin layer formed by curing the resin material is, for example, the resin material before being applied to the first substrate, the first resin layer and the second inorganic layer in step B being brought into contact with each other.
  • the peak intensity of a specific bond and structure if there are multiple peaks such as imide, amide, etc., the sum of those peak intensities
  • FT-IR Fastier transform infrared spectroscopy
  • the maximum peak intensity may be used.
  • the rate of increase in peak intensity may be calculated using the following formula, and the calculated value may be used as the curing rate of the first resin layer.
  • Rate of increase in peak intensity (curing rate of the first resin layer) [(Specific bond and structure of the first resin layer before contacting the first resin layer and the second inorganic layer in step B) peak intensity)/(peak intensity of specific bond and structure of the first resin layer after heating at 300°C for 1 hour in step C)] ⁇ 100
  • background signal removal may be performed using a normal method.
  • the FT-IR measurement can be performed by a transmission method or a reflection method, if necessary.
  • the peak intensity may be read as the total intensity of the multiple peak intensities.
  • the composite modulus of elasticity of the first resin layer at 23°C is preferably 0.1 GPa or more and 20 GPa or less, and 0. More preferably, it is .1 GPa or more and 10 GPa or less.
  • the voids formed when the first resin layer and the second inorganic layer are brought into contact in step B are absorbed by the first resin layer in step C, suppressing the generation of voids.
  • this makes it easy to temporarily fix the first resin layer and the second inorganic material layer, which will be described later, at a low temperature.
  • the composite modulus of elasticity of the first resin layer at 23° C. is preferably 8 GPa or less, more preferably 6 GPa or less, from the viewpoint of suitably suppressing the generation of voids. Further, the composite modulus of elasticity of the first resin layer at 23° C. is preferably 0.1 GPa or more, more preferably 1 GPa or more, from the viewpoint of suitably suppressing misalignment. Further, the preferable range of the composite modulus of the second resin layer at 23°C is the same as the preferable range of the composite modulus of the first resin layer at 23°C.
  • the composite modulus of elasticity at 23° C. of the second resin layer may be the composite modulus at 23° C. before contacting with another layer (for example, another inorganic material layer).
  • the composite elastic modulus of the resin layer at 23° C. can be measured by the method described below.
  • a measurement sample is prepared by preparing a resin composition containing a resin material, spin-coating it on a silicon substrate, and then heating it at 400° C. for 10 minutes.
  • the unloading-displacement curve at 23°C was measured at a test depth of 20 nm using a nanoindentator (trade name TI-950 Tribo Indenter, manufactured by Hysitron, Berkovich type indenter), and the unloading-displacement curve was determined as a reference.
  • the composite modulus at 23°C is calculated from the maximum load and maximum displacement.
  • the composite modulus of elasticity is defined by the following formula (1).
  • E r represents the composite modulus of elasticity
  • E i represents the Young's modulus of the indenter and is 1140 GPa
  • ⁇ i represents the Poisson's ratio of the indenter and is 0.07
  • E s and ⁇ s represent the Young's modulus and Poisson's ratio of the sample, respectively.
  • the surface roughness (Ra) of the first resin layer is preferably 0.01 nm or more and 1.2 nm or less. , more preferably 0.1 nm or more and 1.0 nm or less. This makes it easy to temporarily fix the first resin layer and the second inorganic material layer, which will be described later, at a low temperature.
  • the preferable range of the surface roughness (Ra) of the second resin layer is the same as the preferable range of the surface roughness (Ra) of the first resin layer.
  • the surface roughness (Ra) of the second resin layer may be the surface roughness (Ra) before contacting with another layer (for example, another inorganic material layer).
  • the surface roughness of the resin layer can be evaluated by morphological observation using a scanning probe microscope (SPM). Specifically, the surface roughness is determined by measuring a 3 ⁇ m ⁇ 3 ⁇ m square area using SPM SPA400 (manufactured by Hitachi High-Technologies) in dynamic force microscope mode.
  • SPM scanning probe microscope
  • the method for manufacturing a substrate laminate of the present disclosure may include various steps described below before the above-mentioned step B. The following various steps are preferably performed after step A and before step B.
  • the method for manufacturing a substrate laminate according to the present disclosure may include, before step B, a step of subjecting the second inorganic material layer to a surface activation treatment.
  • a step of subjecting the second inorganic material layer to a surface activation treatment By performing the surface activation treatment, the bonding strength between the first resin layer and the second inorganic layer can be increased.
  • the viewpoint is to promote the diffusion of metal such as copper contained in the electrodes and to increase the bonding strength between the electrodes. From the viewpoint of reducing the heating temperature during metal diffusion, it is preferable to perform a surface activation treatment.
  • first inorganic layer in the first substrate may also be subjected to surface activation treatment, especially when the first inorganic layer is bonded to another layer (for example, another resin layer).
  • first inorganic material layer may also be subjected to surface activation treatment before bonding.
  • the surface activation treatment includes plasma treatment, FAB (Fast Atom Bombardment) treatment, and the like.
  • the method for manufacturing a substrate laminate according to the present disclosure may include, before step B, a step of cleaning the second inorganic material layer in order to remove particles and the like.
  • the above-mentioned cleaning step is preferably performed after the surface treatment step and before step B.
  • the first inorganic layer on the first substrate may be cleaned.
  • the first inorganic layer may be cleaned before bonding. You may wash the first inorganic material layer.
  • the cleaning method is not particularly limited, and may include wet cleaning using a solvent such as alkaline cleaning solution, acidic cleaning solution, hydrofluoric acid-containing cleaning solution, permanganic acid-containing solution (desmear solution), wet cleaning using pure water, etc., UV ozone, plasma.
  • a solvent such as alkaline cleaning solution, acidic cleaning solution, hydrofluoric acid-containing cleaning solution, permanganic acid-containing solution (desmear solution), wet cleaning using pure water, etc., UV ozone, plasma.
  • a solvent such as alkaline cleaning solution, acidic cleaning solution, hydrofluoric acid-containing cleaning solution, permanganic acid-containing solution (desmear solution), wet cleaning using pure water, etc., UV ozone, plasma.
  • the method for manufacturing a substrate laminate of the present disclosure includes, before step B, a second inorganic layer, which prevents foreign matter from adhering to the inorganic layer (for example, from preventing foreign matter from adhering during dicing).
  • the method may include a step of providing a surface protective layer on the surface. The step of providing a surface protective layer is preferably performed before the above-mentioned cleaning step and before step B.
  • the surface protective layer is not particularly limited as long as it can protect the second inorganic layer, and may include a water-soluble resin, a photoresist that can be cleaned with an organic solvent such as NMP (N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone), etc. Can be mentioned.
  • a water-soluble resin a photoresist that can be cleaned with an organic solvent such as NMP (N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone), etc.
  • NMP N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone
  • Hogomax from Disco may be used.
  • the second laminate provided with the surface protective layer may be subjected to dicing as necessary, and the surface protective layer may be peeled off after the dicing.
  • the surface protective layer is peeled off after the dicing process, and the above-mentioned cleaning step and step B are performed in this order after the surface protective layer is peeled off.
  • the method for manufacturing a substrate laminate of the present disclosure may include a step of temporarily fixing the first laminate and the second laminate after step B and before step C.
  • Temporary fixing of the first laminate and the second laminate is preferably carried out at a low temperature between room temperature and 100°C, more preferably between room temperature and 50°C, and more preferably at room temperature. preferable.
  • the surface energy of the bonding interface between the first and second laminates is determined by the handling in step C. From the viewpoint of ease of assembly, suppression of misalignment (displacement of bonding position), suppression of foreign matter contamination, etc., it is preferably 0.05 J/m 2 or more, more preferably 0.1 J/m 2 or more, and 0. More preferably, it is .15 J/m 2 or more.
  • the surface energy (bond strength) of the bond interface mentioned above was determined by a blade insertion test according to the method in the non-patent document MP Maszara, G. Goetz, A. Cavigila, and JBMckitterick, Journal of Applied Physics, 64 (1988) 4943-4950. You can ask for it.
  • a blade with a thickness of 0.1 mm to 0.3 mm is inserted into the joint interface of the temporarily fixed laminate, and the distance at which the laminate separates from the blade edge is measured using an infrared light source and an infrared camera. After that, the surface energy may be determined based on the following formula.
  • 3 ⁇ 109 ⁇ tb2 ⁇ E2 ⁇ t6 /(32 ⁇ L4 ⁇ E ⁇ t3 )
  • is the surface energy (J/m 2 )
  • t b is the blade thickness (m)
  • E is the Young's modulus (GPa) of the silicon substrate included in the first substrate and the second substrate
  • t is the The thicknesses (m) of the first substrate and the second substrate
  • L represent the peeling distance (m) of the laminate from the blade edge.
  • the method for manufacturing a substrate laminate of the present disclosure includes, after step B, step C of heating the first laminate and the second laminate at 100° C. or higher. Thereby, a substrate laminate is obtained in which the first laminate and the second laminate are joined via the first resin layer and the second inorganic material layer.
  • the absolute pressure is preferably 10 ⁇ 4 Pa or less superatmospheric pressure.
  • the absolute pressure is more preferably at least 10 ⁇ 3 Pa and at most atmospheric pressure, even more preferably at least 100 Pa and at most atmospheric pressure, particularly preferably at least 1000 Pa and at most atmospheric pressure.
  • it may be performed in an atmospheric atmosphere or in an inert gas (nitrogen gas, argon gas, helium gas, etc.) atmosphere.
  • the first laminate and the second laminate are preferably heated at 100° C. to 450° C. while the first resin layer and the second inorganic layer are in contact with each other.
  • the above temperature refers to the temperature of the surface of the first substrate on which the first resin layer is formed.
  • the temperature is preferably 100°C to 400°C, more preferably 130°C to 350°C, more preferably 150°C to 300°C, even more preferably 150°C to 250°C, and particularly preferably 150°C to 200°C.
  • the above-mentioned temperature is 130 ° C. or higher.
  • the temperature is preferably 150°C or higher, more preferably 200°C or higher.
  • Heating in step C can be performed by a conventional method using a furnace or a hot plate. Further, the heating in step C may be performed in an atmospheric atmosphere or in an inert gas (nitrogen gas, argon gas, helium gas, etc.) atmosphere.
  • the heating time in step C is not particularly limited, and is, for example, 3 hours or less, preferably 1 hour or less. There is no particular restriction on the lower limit of the heating time, and it can be set to, for example, 5 minutes.
  • step C in order to increase the bonding strength between the first laminate and the second laminate, the first laminate and the second laminate are bonded with the first resin layer and the second inorganic material layer in contact with each other.
  • the second laminate may be pressurized. Pressurization may be performed simultaneously with heating.
  • the pressure when pressurizing the first laminate and the second laminate is not particularly limited, and is preferably 0.1 MPa or more and 10 MPa or less, more preferably 0.1 MPa or more and 5 MPa or less.
  • the pressurizing device for example, TEST MINI PRESS manufactured by Toyo Seiki Seisakusho Co., Ltd. may be used.
  • the method for manufacturing a substrate laminate of the present disclosure includes, after step C, penetrating the first laminate and the second laminate from the first inorganic layer side surface to the second resin layer side surface.
  • the method may include a step of providing a hole and forming an electrode that penetrates the first stacked body and the second stacked body in the through hole.
  • the electrodes penetrating the first laminate and the second laminate are formed in the through holes. Preferably, it is formed.
  • a through hole penetrating the first laminate and the second laminate may be formed by a known method, and an electrode may be formed in the formed hole.
  • methods for forming the holes include dry etching using gas, laser ablation, and the like.
  • Examples of methods for forming electrodes penetrating the first laminate and the second laminate include electrolytic plating, electroless plating, sputtering, and inkjet methods.
  • the material of the electrodes penetrating the first laminate and the second laminate is not particularly limited, and conventionally known electrode materials may be used. Specific examples include copper, solder, tin, gold, silver, aluminum, indium, cobalt, and tungsten.
  • At least one of the first substrate and the second substrate further includes another substrate on a surface on the first inorganic material layer side and a surface on the second resin layer side.
  • Another laminate or the like may be laminated.
  • the preferred material for the other substrate is the same as the preferred material for the first substrate and the second substrate.
  • Preferred embodiments of the other laminate are the same as those of the first laminate and the second laminate.
  • the surface of the substrate laminate may be subjected to thinning processing (back grinding or back grinding) if necessary.
  • the bonding layer means a layer in a bonded state consisting of an inorganic material layer/resin layer.
  • Si/bonding layer/Si, SiO2 /bonding layer/Si, SiO2 /bonding layer/ SiO2 Cu/bonding layer/Cu, For microchannel; PDMS/bonding layer/PDMS, PDMS/bonding layer/SiO 2 , For CMOS image sensor; SiO 2 /bonding layer/SiO 2 , Si/bonding layer/Si, SiO 2 /bonding layer/Si, For through silicon vias (TSV); SiO 2 (with Cu electrode) / bonding layer / SiO 2 (with Cu electrode), Si (with Cu electrode) / bonding layer / Si (with Cu electrode), For optical devices; (InGaAlAs, InGaAs, InP, GaA
  • FIGS. 1a to 1h and FIGS. 2a to 2i an example of a method for manufacturing a substrate stack will be described using FIGS. 1a to 1h and FIGS. 2a to 2i.
  • the present disclosure is not limited to the configuration shown in the drawings.
  • the sizes of the members in FIGS. 1a to 1h and 2a to 2i are conceptual, and the relative size relationships between the members are not limited thereto.
  • members having substantially the same function are given the same reference numerals in all drawings, and overlapping explanations may be omitted.
  • Example 1 of manufacturing method of substrate laminate> ⁇ Example 1 of manufacturing method of substrate laminate>
  • Example 1 of the method for manufacturing a substrate stack will be described using FIGS. 1a to 1h.
  • a wafer 3 having a flattened surface and having electrodes 4 extending therethrough is prepared.
  • An inorganic material layer 5 such as an oxide film is formed on the surface of the wafer 3.
  • a wafer 3 provided with an electrode 4 is fixed to a carrier 1 via a temporary fixing material 2.
  • the inorganic material layer 5 on the surface of the wafer 3 is subjected to the surface activation treatment as described above.
  • a laminate is prepared that includes an inorganic material layer 15, a wafer 13, and a resin layer 16 in this order, and further includes an electrode 14 that penetrates the wafer 13.
  • a surface protection material 6 is disposed on the inorganic material layer 15 side of the laminate.
  • the surface protection material 6 is peeled off to obtain a singulated laminate.
  • the singulation laminate includes, in this order, an inorganic material layer 15A, a wafer 13A, and a resin layer 16A, each of which has been singulated. Furthermore, the singulated laminate includes an electrode 14A that penetrates the singulated laminate. From the viewpoint of removing foreign matter, the surface of the singulated laminate may be washed with pure water, a solvent, etc. after the surface protection material 6 is peeled off. At this time, a plurality of singulated laminates may be washed all at once while being loaded on the frame.
  • the inorganic material layer 5 on the surface of the wafer 3 and the resin layer 16A of the singulated laminate are brought into contact and temporarily fixed.
  • a plurality of singulated laminates may be temporarily fixed along the width direction and the length direction.
  • the inorganic material layer 15A of the singulated laminate temporarily fixed to the wafer 3 is subjected to the surface activation treatment as described above.
  • the surface of the inorganic layer 15A may be washed with pure water, a solvent, or the like.
  • a singulated laminate is obtained, each of which includes the singulated inorganic material layer 15B, the wafer 13B, and the resin layer 16B in this order.
  • the singulated laminate includes an electrode 14B that penetrates the singulated laminate.
  • the inorganic material layer 15A of the singulated laminate temporarily fixed to the wafer 3 and the resin layer 16B of the singulated laminate are brought into contact and temporarily fixed. At this time, a plurality of singulated laminates may be temporarily fixed along the width direction and the length direction.
  • the singulated laminates are stacked in a temporarily fixed state in the height direction.
  • the laminate of the singulated laminates is heated at 100° C. or higher.
  • the wafer 3 and the singulated wafer 13B are bonded via the inorganic material layer 5 and the resin layer 16A, and the wafer 3 and the singulated wafer 13B are bonded in the height direction via each of the singulated inorganic material layers and each resin layer.
  • the stacked singulated laminates can be joined. From the viewpoint of increasing the bonding strength between each electrode, it is preferable to heat the laminate of the singulated laminate at 130° C. or higher. As a result, components (for example, copper) contained in each electrode tend to diffuse, and the bonding strength between the electrodes tends to increase.
  • a substrate laminate 100 is obtained as shown in FIG. 1h.
  • Example 2 of the method for manufacturing a substrate stack will be described below with reference to FIGS. 2a to 2i.
  • a wafer without electrodes is used, a through hole is finally provided in the substrate stack without electrodes, and an electrode is provided in the through hole, which is the same as described above. This is different from Example 1 of the method for manufacturing a substrate laminate.
  • a wafer 23 with a flattened surface is prepared.
  • An inorganic material layer 25 such as an oxide film is formed on the surface of the wafer 23 .
  • the wafer 23 is fixed to the carrier 1 via the temporary fixing material 2.
  • the inorganic material layer 25 on the surface of the wafer 23 is subjected to the surface activation treatment as described above.
  • a laminate including an inorganic material layer 35, a wafer 33, and a resin layer 36 in this order is prepared.
  • a surface protection material 6 is disposed on the inorganic material layer 35 side of the laminate.
  • the surface protection material 6 is peeled off to obtain a singulated laminate.
  • the singulation laminate includes, in this order, an inorganic material layer 35A, a wafer 33A, and a resin layer 36A, each of which has been singulated.
  • the surface of the singulated laminate may be washed with pure water, a solvent, etc. after the surface protection material 6 is peeled off. At this time, a plurality of singulated laminates may be washed all at once while being loaded on the frame.
  • the inorganic material layer 25 on the surface of the wafer 23 and the resin layer 36A of the singulated laminate are brought into contact and temporarily fixed.
  • a plurality of singulated laminates may be temporarily fixed along the width direction and the length direction.
  • the inorganic material layer 35A of the singulated laminate temporarily fixed to the wafer 23 is subjected to the surface activation treatment as described above.
  • the surface of the inorganic layer 35A may be washed with pure water, a solvent, or the like.
  • a singulated laminate which includes an inorganic material layer 35B, a wafer 33B, and a resin layer 36B, each of which has been singulated, in this order.
  • the inorganic material layer 35A of the singulated laminate temporarily fixed to the wafer 23 and the resin layer 36B of the singulated laminate are brought into contact and temporarily fixed.
  • a plurality of singulated laminates may be temporarily fixed along the width direction and the length direction.
  • the singulated laminates are stacked in a temporarily fixed state in the height direction.
  • the laminate of the singulated laminates is heated at 100° C. or higher.
  • the wafer 23 and the singulated wafer 33B are bonded via the inorganic material layer 25 and the resin layer 36A, and the wafer 23 and the singulated wafer 33B are bonded in the height direction through the inorganic material layer 25 and the resin layer 36A.
  • the stacked singulated laminates can be joined.
  • a substrate stack 200 is obtained, as shown in FIG. 2h.
  • a through hole is provided that penetrates the singulated laminate stacked on the substrate laminate 200 along the height direction.
  • methods for forming the through holes include dry etching using gas, laser ablation, and the like.
  • an electrode 34 is formed that penetrates the singulated laminate stacked against the through hole.
  • the substrate laminate of the present disclosure includes a first resin layer, a first substrate, and a first inorganic material layer in this order, the first resin layer is disposed on one surface, and the first resin layer is arranged on one surface, and a first laminate in which one inorganic layer is disposed on the other surface; It has a second resin layer, a second substrate, and a second inorganic material layer in this order, the second resin layer being disposed on one surface, and the second inorganic material layer being disposed on the other surface.
  • a second laminate placed on the surface of the has The first laminate and the second laminate are laminated via the first resin layer of the first laminate and the second inorganic layer of the second laminate. .
  • the first laminate and the second laminate in the substrate laminate of the present disclosure may be a laminate three-dimensionally mounted on a substrate such as a wafer, and the substrate laminate of the present disclosure described above may be a laminate that is three-dimensionally mounted on a substrate such as a wafer.
  • Examples include a first laminate, a second laminate, etc. used in the manufacturing method.
  • Preferred forms of the first laminate and the second laminate in the substrate laminate are similar to the preferred forms of the first laminate and the second laminate in the method for manufacturing a substrate laminate of the present disclosure described above. be.
  • specific examples of the first laminate and the second laminate in the substrate laminate include a laminate as shown in FIG. 1c or 2c, and a singulated laminate as shown in FIGS. 1d and 2d.
  • Examples include laminated bodies.
  • the first laminate or the second laminate in the substrate laminate of the present disclosure is preferably a laminate for a three-dimensional semiconductor device.
  • the first laminate includes an electrode on a part of the surface of the first resin layer and a part of the surface of the first inorganic material layer
  • the second laminate preferably includes electrodes on a part of the surface of the second resin layer and a part of the surface of the second inorganic material layer. Note that the preferred form of the electrode is the same as the preferred form of the electrode in the method for manufacturing a substrate laminate of the present disclosure described above.
  • a modified example of manufacturing method of substrate laminate In a modified example of the method for manufacturing a substrate laminate according to the present disclosure, instead of the first laminate, a laminate (third laminate), and instead of the second laminate, a laminate (third laminate) in which the second resin layer, the first substrate, and the fourth resin layer are laminated in this order.
  • This method is different from the method for manufacturing a substrate laminate according to the present disclosure described above in that it is used. That is, in the laminate (third laminate), the first inorganic layer in the first laminate is replaced with the third resin layer, and in the laminate (fourth laminate), the first inorganic layer in the first laminate is replaced with the third resin layer. The second inorganic material layer in the second laminate is replaced with a fourth resin layer. Then, by joining the first resin layer and the fourth resin layer in step C, a substrate laminate is obtained in a modified example.
  • the first resin layer and the fourth resin layer preferably have different resin compositions, and the resin material used to form the first resin layer and the resin material used to form the fourth resin layer It is preferable that the resin composition is different from that of the resin material. Thereby, even if the thickness of the third laminate and the fourth laminate is small, warping of the substrate laminate tends to be suitably suppressed.
  • the resin material used for forming the first resin layer is preferably a resin material capable of forming a resin layer having a composite modulus of elasticity of 0.1 GPa or more and 10 GPa at 23°C. That is, the composite modulus of elasticity of the first resin layer at 23° C. is preferably 0.1 GPa or more and 10 GPa or less.
  • the resin material used to form the first resin layer and the preferable conditions for the first resin layer are the same as the preferable conditions described in the above-mentioned method for manufacturing a substrate laminate of the present disclosure.
  • the resin material used to form the fourth resin layer is not particularly limited as long as it has a composition different from the resin material used to form the first resin layer, and examples thereof include polyimide, polyamide, polyamideimide, parylene, etc. , materials in which bonds or structures are formed by crosslinking, such as polyarylene ether, tetrahydronaphthalene, octahydroanthracene, etc., materials in which nitrogen ring-containing structures are formed, such as polybenzoxazal, polybenzoxazine, Si-O, etc. Examples include materials whose bonds or structures are formed by crosslinking, organic materials such as siloxane-modified compounds, benzocyclobutene, and epoxy compounds.
  • the resin material used to form the fourth resin layer is preferably a material in which polyimide bonds are formed by crosslinking, benzocyclobutene, epoxy compounds, siloxane-modified compounds, etc.
  • the material in which polyimide bonds are formed by crosslinking is preferably a siloxane compound in which polyimide bonds are formed by crosslinking, and the siloxane-modified compound is preferably an epoxy-modified siloxane.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
  • Power Engineering (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Condensed Matter Physics & Semiconductors (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Ceramic Engineering (AREA)
  • Manufacturing & Machinery (AREA)
  • Laminated Bodies (AREA)

Abstract

This substrate layered body manufacturing method includes: a step A for preparing a first layered body in which a first resin layer, a first substrate, and a first organic material layer are layered in that order, the first resin layer is disposed on one surface, and the first inorganic material layer is disposed on the other surface, and a second layered body in which a second resin layer, a second substrate, and a second inorganic material layer are layered in that order, the second resin layer is disposed on one surface, and the second inorganic material layer is disposed on the other surface; a step B for layering the first layered body and the second layered body by bringing into contact the first resin layer of the first layered body and the second inorganic material layer of the second layered body; and a step C for heating the first layered body and the second layered body at 100°C or higher after said step B.

Description

基板積層体の製造方法及び基板積層体Manufacturing method of substrate laminate and substrate laminate

 本開示は、基板積層体の製造方法及び基板積層体に関する。 The present disclosure relates to a method for manufacturing a substrate laminate and a substrate laminate.

 電子機器の小型軽量化、高性能化が進行するに伴い、半導体チップ等の高集積化が求められている。しかし、回路の微細化ではその要求に十分に応えることは困難である。そこで、近年、複数枚の半導体基板(ウエハ)、半導体チップ等を縦に積層し、多層の三次元構造とすることにより高集積化する方法が提案されている。半導体基板(ウエハ)、半導体チップ等(以後、「半導体基板等」と称する場合がある)を積層する方法としては、基板同士の直接接合方法、接着剤を用いる方法等が提案されている(例えば、特許文献1~3)。 As electronic devices become smaller, lighter, and more sophisticated, there is a demand for higher integration of semiconductor chips, etc. However, it is difficult to fully meet this demand with miniaturization of circuits. Therefore, in recent years, a method has been proposed in which a plurality of semiconductor substrates (wafers), semiconductor chips, etc. are vertically stacked to form a multilayer three-dimensional structure to achieve high integration. As methods for stacking semiconductor substrates (wafers), semiconductor chips, etc. (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "semiconductor substrates, etc."), methods such as direct bonding of the substrates and methods using adhesives have been proposed (e.g. , Patent Documents 1 to 3).

  特許文献1:特開平4-132258号公報
  特許文献2:特開2010-226060号公報
  特許文献3:特開2016-47895号公報
Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 4-132258 Patent Document 2: Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2010-226060 Patent Document 3: Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-47895

 直接接合では、基板表面の配線等による微細な凹凸、パーティクルなどによりボイドが発生しやすいという問題がある。半導体基板等を積層する方法として、基板上に設けられた酸化ケイ素等の無機材料同士を接合する方法も想定される。しかし、基板の無機材料同士を接合させる方法では、直接接合と同様に、ボイドが発生しやすいという問題がある。 Direct bonding has the problem that voids are likely to occur due to fine irregularities and particles caused by wiring on the surface of the substrate. As a method of stacking semiconductor substrates and the like, a method of bonding inorganic materials such as silicon oxide provided on the substrates is also considered. However, the method of bonding inorganic materials of the substrates has the same problem as direct bonding that voids are likely to occur.

 一方で、接着剤を用いて接合する場合、接着剤を基板表面に付与し、次いで乾燥させて半硬化状態とした後に基板同士を貼り合わせる。このとき、ボイドの発生を抑制する点から、基板の接合面に接着剤を付与して接着層を形成し、接着層同士を接合することが考えられる。さらに、基板の接合面同士を貼り合わせる際の接合強度を高める点から、基板の接合面にプラズマ処理、FAB(Fast Atom Bombardment、高速原子衝撃)処理等の表面活性化処理を施すことが好ましい。 On the other hand, in the case of bonding using an adhesive, the adhesive is applied to the surface of the substrate, and then dried to a semi-cured state, and then the substrates are bonded together. At this time, in order to suppress the generation of voids, it is conceivable to apply an adhesive to the bonding surfaces of the substrates to form an adhesive layer and bond the adhesive layers to each other. Furthermore, in order to increase the bonding strength when bonding the bonding surfaces of the substrates together, it is preferable to subject the bonding surfaces of the substrates to a surface activation treatment such as plasma treatment or FAB (Fast Atom Bombardment) treatment.

 しかし、接着層に対して表面活性化処理を施した場合、表面活性化処理により接着層に含まれる樹脂に影響が生じ、接着層が変質する等、信頼性に影響を及ぼすおそれがある。あるいは、基板の接合面におけるパーティクル等を除去する点から、接合面を洗浄する場合があるが、接合面に接着層が設けられていると洗浄方法が制限されるといった問題がある。以上の点から、基板の接合面に樹脂層を設けた場合であっても、基板の接合面の表面活性化処理及び洗浄処理の方法の制限が抑制された基板積層体の製造方法が望ましい。 However, when surface activation treatment is performed on the adhesive layer, the surface activation treatment may affect the resin contained in the adhesive layer, causing deterioration of the adhesive layer, which may affect reliability. Alternatively, the bonding surface of the substrate may be cleaned in order to remove particles and the like on the bonding surface, but if an adhesive layer is provided on the bonding surface, there is a problem in that cleaning methods are limited. In view of the above, even when a resin layer is provided on the bonding surfaces of the substrates, it is desirable to have a method for manufacturing a substrate stack in which restrictions on the method of surface activation treatment and cleaning treatment of the bonding surfaces of the substrates are suppressed.

 本発明の一態様は、上記問題に鑑みてなされたものであり、基板の接合面に樹脂層を設けられ、かつ基板の接合面の表面活性化処理及び洗浄処理の方法の制限が抑制された基板積層体の製造方法及びこの製造方法に使用可能な積層体を提供することを目的とする。 One aspect of the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and includes providing a resin layer on the bonding surface of the substrate, and suppressing restrictions on the method of surface activation treatment and cleaning treatment of the bonding surface of the substrate. An object of the present invention is to provide a method for manufacturing a substrate laminate and a laminate that can be used in this manufacturing method.

 前記課題を解決するための具体的手段は以下のとおりである。
<1> 第1の樹脂層、第1の基板、第1の無機材層の順番に積層されており、前記第1の樹脂層が一方の表面に配置されており、前記第1の無機材層がもう一方の表面に配置されている第1の積層体と、第2の樹脂層、第2の基板、第2の無機材層の順番に積層されており、前記第2の樹脂層が一方の表面に配置されており、前記第2の無機材層がもう一方の表面に配置されている第2の積層体と、を準備する工程Aと、
 前記第1の積層体の前記第1の樹脂層と前記第2の積層体の前記第2の無機材層とを接触させて前記第1の積層体及び前記第2の積層体を積層する工程Bと、
 前記工程Bの後に、前記第1の積層体及び前記第2の積層体を100℃以上で加熱する工程Cを含む、基板積層体の製造方法。
<2> 前記第1の積層体は、前記第1の樹脂層の表面の一部及び前記第1の無機材層の表面の一部に電極を備え、
 前記第2の積層体は、前記第2の樹脂層の表面の一部及び前記第2の無機材層の表面の一部に電極を備える、<1>に記載の基板積層体の製造方法。
<3> 前記工程Bの前に、前記第2の無機材層に表面活性化処理を施す工程を含む、<2>に記載の基板積層体の製造方法。
<4> 前記工程Cの後に、前記第1の無機材層側の面から前記第2の樹脂層側の面に向かって前記第1の積層体及び前記第2の積層体に貫通孔を設け、前記貫通孔に前記第1の積層体及び前記第2の積層体を貫通する電極を形成する工程を含む、<1>に記載の基板積層体の製造方法。
<5> 前記工程Bの前に、前記第2の無機材層を洗浄する工程を含む、<1>~<4>のいずれか1つに記載の基板積層体の製造方法。
<6> 前記工程Bの前に、前記第2の無機材層に表面保護層を設ける工程を含む、<1>~<5>のいずれか1つに記載の基板積層体の製造方法。
<7> 前記工程Bにおける前記第1の樹脂層と前記第2の無機材層とを接触させる前にて、前記第1の樹脂層の23℃における複合弾性率は、0.1GPa以上20GPa以下である、<1>~<6>のいずれか1つに記載の基板積層体の製造方法。
<8> 前記工程Bにおける前記第1の樹脂層と前記第2の無機材層とを接触させる前にて、前記第1の樹脂層の硬化率は、70%以上100%以下である、<1>~<7>のいずれか1つに記載の基板積層体の製造方法。
<9> 前記工程Bにおける前記第1の樹脂層と前記第2の無機材層とを接触させる前にて、前記第1の樹脂層の表面粗度(Ra)は、0.01nm以上1.2nm以下である、<1>~<8>のいずれか1つに記載の基板積層体の製造方法。
<10> 前記第1の樹脂層の表面にシラノール基、アミノ基、エポキシ基、水酸基及び不飽和結合を有する官能基からなる群より選択される少なくとも1つの官能基を有する、<1>~<9>のいずれか1つに記載の基板積層体の製造方法。
<11> 前記第1の樹脂層は、
 シロキサン結合と、
 エステル結合、エーテル結合、アミド結合及びイミド結合からなる群より選択される少なくともいずれか1つと、を含む、<1>~<10>のいずれか1つに記載の基板積層体の製造方法。
<12> 前記第2の無機材層は、Si、Ga、Ge及びAsからなる群より選択される少なくとも1種の元素を含む、<1>~<11>のいずれか1つに記載の基板積層体の製造方法。
<13> 第1の樹脂層、第1の基板、第1の無機材層とをこの順に有し、前記第1の樹脂層が一方の表面に配置されており、前記第1の無機材層がもう一方の表面に配置されている第1の積層体と、
 第2の樹脂層、第2の基板、第2の無機材層とをこの順に有し、前記第2の樹脂層が一方の表面に配置されており、前記第2の無機材層がもう一方の表面に配置されている第2の積層体と、
 を有し、
 前記第1の積層体の前記第1の樹脂層と前記第2の積層体の前記第2の無機材層とを介して前記第1の積層体及び前記第2の積層体が積層されている、基板積層体。
<14> 前記第1の積層体は、前記第1の樹脂層の表面の一部及び前記第1の無機材層の表面の一部に電極を備え、
 前記第2の積層体は、前記第2の樹脂層の表面の一部及び前記第2の無機材層の表面の一部に電極を備える、<13>に記載の基板積層体。
Specific means for solving the above problem are as follows.
<1> A first resin layer, a first substrate, and a first inorganic material layer are laminated in this order, the first resin layer is disposed on one surface, and the first inorganic material layer is laminated in this order. A first laminate having a layer disposed on the other surface, a second resin layer, a second substrate, and a second inorganic material layer are laminated in this order, and the second resin layer is a second laminate that is disposed on one surface and the second inorganic material layer is disposed on the other surface;
Laminating the first laminate and the second laminate by bringing the first resin layer of the first laminate into contact with the second inorganic layer of the second laminate. B and
A method for manufacturing a substrate laminate, including a step C of heating the first laminate and the second laminate at 100° C. or higher after the step B.
<2> The first laminate includes an electrode on a part of the surface of the first resin layer and a part of the surface of the first inorganic material layer,
The method for manufacturing a substrate laminate according to <1>, wherein the second laminate includes an electrode on a part of the surface of the second resin layer and a part of the surface of the second inorganic material layer.
<3> The method for manufacturing a substrate laminate according to <2>, including a step of subjecting the second inorganic material layer to a surface activation treatment before the step B.
<4> After the step C, a through hole is provided in the first laminate and the second laminate from the first inorganic layer side surface to the second resin layer side surface. , the method for manufacturing a substrate laminate according to <1>, including the step of forming an electrode penetrating the first laminate and the second laminate in the through hole.
<5> The method for manufacturing a substrate laminate according to any one of <1> to <4>, including a step of cleaning the second inorganic material layer before the step B.
<6> The method for manufacturing a substrate laminate according to any one of <1> to <5>, including the step of providing a surface protective layer on the second inorganic material layer before the step B.
<7> Before the first resin layer and the second inorganic layer are brought into contact in the step B, the composite modulus of elasticity of the first resin layer at 23° C. is 0.1 GPa or more and 20 GPa or less. The method for manufacturing a substrate laminate according to any one of <1> to <6>.
<8> Before the first resin layer and the second inorganic layer are brought into contact in the step B, the curing rate of the first resin layer is 70% or more and 100% or less, < The method for manufacturing a substrate laminate according to any one of items 1> to <7>.
<9> Before the first resin layer and the second inorganic layer are brought into contact in the step B, the surface roughness (Ra) of the first resin layer is 0.01 nm or more and 1. The method for manufacturing a substrate laminate according to any one of <1> to <8>, which has a thickness of 2 nm or less.
<10> The surface of the first resin layer has at least one functional group selected from the group consisting of a silanol group, an amino group, an epoxy group, a hydroxyl group, and a functional group having an unsaturated bond, <1> to <9>.The method for manufacturing a substrate laminate according to any one of 9>.
<11> The first resin layer is
siloxane bond,
The method for producing a substrate laminate according to any one of <1> to <10>, including at least one selected from the group consisting of an ester bond, an ether bond, an amide bond, and an imide bond.
<12> The substrate according to any one of <1> to <11>, wherein the second inorganic layer contains at least one element selected from the group consisting of Si, Ga, Ge, and As. Method for manufacturing a laminate.
<13> The first resin layer, the first substrate, and the first inorganic layer are arranged in this order, the first resin layer is disposed on one surface, and the first inorganic layer is disposed on the other surface of the first laminate;
It has a second resin layer, a second substrate, and a second inorganic material layer in this order, the second resin layer being disposed on one surface, and the second inorganic material layer being disposed on the other surface. a second laminate placed on the surface of the
has
The first laminate and the second laminate are laminated via the first resin layer of the first laminate and the second inorganic layer of the second laminate. , substrate laminate.
<14> The first laminate includes an electrode on a part of the surface of the first resin layer and a part of the surface of the first inorganic material layer,
The second laminate is a substrate laminate according to <13>, wherein the second laminate includes an electrode on a part of the surface of the second resin layer and a part of the surface of the second inorganic material layer.

 本発明の一態様は、基板の接合面に樹脂層を設けられ、かつ基板の接合面の表面活性化処理及び洗浄処理の方法の制限が抑制された基板積層体の製造方法及びこの製造方法に使用可能な積層体を提供することができる。 One aspect of the present invention is a method for manufacturing a substrate laminate in which a resin layer is provided on the bonding surface of the substrate, and limitations on methods of surface activation treatment and cleaning treatment of the bonding surface of the substrate are suppressed, and the manufacturing method A usable laminate can be provided.

図1a~図1hは、本開示の基板積層体の製造方法の例1を示す概略構成図である。1a to 1h are schematic configuration diagrams showing Example 1 of the method for manufacturing a substrate stack of the present disclosure. 図2a~図2iは、本開示の基板積層体の製造方法の例2を示す概略構成図である。2a to 2i are schematic configuration diagrams showing Example 2 of the method for manufacturing a substrate stack of the present disclosure.

 本開示において、「~」を用いて表される数値範囲は、「~」の前後に記載される数値を下限値及び上限値として含む範囲を意味する。
 本開示中に段階的に記載されている数値範囲において、一つの数値範囲で記載された上限値又は下限値は、他の段階的な記載の数値範囲の上限値又は下限値に置き換えてもよい。また、本開示中に記載されている数値範囲において、その数値範囲の上限値又は下限値は、実施例に示されている値に置き換えてもよい。
 本開示において、「基板積層体」は、2つの基板、すなわち、第1の基板及び第2の基板が第1の樹脂層及び第2の無機材層を介して接合された構造を有する積層体を意味する。なお、基板積層体は、3つ以上の基板を有していてもよく、3つ以上の基板の内の2つの基板が第1の樹脂層及び第2の無機材層を介して接合された構造を有していてもよい。
 本開示において、「基板」とは、「第1の基板及び第2の基板の少なくとも一方」を指し、「樹脂層」とは、「第1の樹脂層及び第2の樹脂層の少なくとも一方」を指し、「無機材層」とは、「第1の無機材層及び第2の無機材層の少なくとも一方」を指す。
In the present disclosure, a numerical range expressed using "~" means a range that includes the numerical values written before and after "~" as lower and upper limits.
In the numerical ranges described step by step in this disclosure, the upper limit or lower limit described in one numerical range may be replaced with the upper limit or lower limit of another numerical range described step by step. . Furthermore, in the numerical ranges described in this disclosure, the upper limit or lower limit of the numerical range may be replaced with the values shown in the Examples.
In the present disclosure, a "substrate laminate" refers to a laminate having a structure in which two substrates, that is, a first substrate and a second substrate are joined via a first resin layer and a second inorganic material layer. means. Note that the substrate laminate may have three or more substrates, and two of the three or more substrates are bonded via the first resin layer and the second inorganic material layer. It may have a structure.
In the present disclosure, a "substrate" refers to "at least one of a first substrate and a second substrate," and a "resin layer" refers to "at least one of a first resin layer and a second resin layer." The term "inorganic layer" refers to "at least one of the first inorganic layer and the second inorganic layer."

〔基板積層体の製造方法〕
 本開示の基板積層体の製造方法は、第1の樹脂層、第1の基板、第1の無機材層の順番に積層されており、前記第1の樹脂層が一方の表面に配置されており、前記第1の無機材層がもう一方の表面に配置されている第1の積層体と、第2の樹脂層、第2の基板、第2の無機材層の順番に積層されており、前記第2の樹脂層が一方の表面に配置されており、前記第2の無機材層がもう一方の表面に配置されている第2の積層体と、を準備する工程Aと、前記第1の積層体の前記第1の樹脂層と前記第2の積層体の前記第2の無機材層とを接触させて前記第1の積層体及び前記第2の積層体を積層する工程Bと、前記工程Bの後に、前記第1の積層体及び前記第2の積層体を100℃以上で加熱する工程Cを含む。
[Method for manufacturing substrate laminate]
In the method for manufacturing a substrate laminate of the present disclosure, a first resin layer, a first substrate, and a first inorganic material layer are laminated in this order, and the first resin layer is disposed on one surface. A first laminate in which the first inorganic material layer is disposed on the other surface, a second resin layer, a second substrate, and a second inorganic material layer are laminated in this order. , a step A of preparing a second laminate in which the second resin layer is disposed on one surface and the second inorganic material layer is disposed on the other surface; Step B of laminating the first laminate and the second laminate by bringing the first resin layer of the first laminate into contact with the second inorganic layer of the second laminate; , after the step B, includes a step C of heating the first laminate and the second laminate at 100° C. or higher.

 本開示の基板積層体の製造方法では、工程Aにて樹脂層、基板、無機材層の順番に積層された積層体を少なくとも2つ準備する。準備した2つの積層体について、工程Bにて、一方の積層体の樹脂層(第1の樹脂層)ともう一方の積層体の無機材層(第2の無機材層)とを接触させて積層させる。その後、工程Cにて、積層させた2つの積層体を100℃以上で加熱することで、樹脂層(第1の樹脂層)及び無機材層(第2の無機材層)を介して接合された構造を有する基板積層体が得られる。本開示では、無機材層の表面に対して表面活性化処理、洗浄処理等を行った後、樹脂層及び無機材層を介して2つの基板を接合することができる。これにより、樹脂層の表面に対して表面活性化処理、洗浄処理等を行うことなく、接合面の接合強度を高めたり、無機材層の表面に付着したパーティクル等を除去したりすることができる。したがって、基板の接合面に樹脂層を設けられ、かつ基板の接合面の表面活性化処理及び洗浄処理の方法の制限が抑制された基板積層体の製造方法が提供される。 In the method for manufacturing a substrate laminate of the present disclosure, at least two laminates in which a resin layer, a substrate, and an inorganic material layer are laminated in this order are prepared in step A. For the two prepared laminates, in step B, the resin layer (first resin layer) of one laminate is brought into contact with the inorganic material layer (second inorganic material layer) of the other laminate. Laminate. Then, in step C, the two laminated bodies are heated at 100°C or higher to join them through the resin layer (first resin layer) and inorganic layer (second inorganic layer). A substrate laminate having a structure is obtained. In the present disclosure, after surface activation treatment, cleaning treatment, etc. are performed on the surface of the inorganic material layer, two substrates can be bonded via the resin layer and the inorganic material layer. This makes it possible to increase the bonding strength of the bonding surface and remove particles attached to the surface of the inorganic layer without performing surface activation treatment, cleaning treatment, etc. on the surface of the resin layer. . Therefore, there is provided a method for manufacturing a substrate stack in which a resin layer is provided on the bonding surfaces of the substrates, and limitations on the method of surface activation treatment and cleaning treatment of the bonding surfaces of the substrates are suppressed.

[工程A]
 本開示の基板積層体の製造方法は、第1の積層体と、第2の積層体と、を準備する工程Aを含む。第1の積層体は、第1の樹脂層、第1の基板及び第1の無機材層をこの順番で備え、第1の樹脂層が一方の表面に配置されており、第1の無機材層がもう一方の表面に配置されている。同様に、第2の積層体は、第2の樹脂層、第2の基板及び第2の無機材層をこの順番で備え、第2の樹脂層が一方の表面に配置されており、第2の無機材層がもう一方の表面に配置されている。
[Process A]
The method for manufacturing a substrate laminate according to the present disclosure includes a step A of preparing a first laminate and a second laminate. The first laminate includes a first resin layer, a first substrate, and a first inorganic material layer in this order, the first resin layer is disposed on one surface, and the first inorganic material layer is arranged on one surface. A layer is placed on the other surface. Similarly, the second laminate includes a second resin layer, a second substrate, and a second inorganic material layer in this order, the second resin layer is disposed on one surface, and the second an inorganic layer is disposed on the other surface.

(第1の基板及び第2の基板)
 第1の基板及び第2の基板の材質は、特に限定されず、通常使用されるものであればよい。なお、第1の基板及び第2の基板の材質は、同じであっても異なっていてもよい。
 第1の基板及び第2の基板としては、Si、Al、Ti、Zr、Hf、Fe、Ni、Cu、Ag、Au、Ga、Ge、Sn、Pd、As、Pt、Mg、In、Ta及びNbからなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の元素を含むことが好ましい。第1の基板及び第2の基板の材質としては、例えば、半導体:Si、InP、GaN、GaAs、InGaAs、InGaAlAs、SiC、酸化物、炭化物、窒化物:ホウ素珪酸ガラス(例えば、パイレックス(登録商標))、石英ガラス(SiO)、サファイア、ZrO、Si、AlN、圧電体、誘電体:BaTiO、LiNbO,SrTiO、ダイヤモンド、金属:Al、Ti、Fe、Cu、Ag、Au、Pt、Pd、Ta、Nbなどである。
(First substrate and second substrate)
The materials of the first substrate and the second substrate are not particularly limited, and may be any commonly used material. Note that the materials of the first substrate and the second substrate may be the same or different.
The first substrate and the second substrate include Si, Al, Ti, Zr, Hf, Fe, Ni, Cu, Ag, Au, Ga, Ge, Sn, Pd, As, Pt, Mg, In, Ta, and It is preferable that at least one element selected from the group consisting of Nb is included. The materials of the first substrate and the second substrate include, for example, semiconductors: Si, InP, GaN, GaAs, InGaAs, InGaAlAs, SiC, oxides, carbides, nitrides: borosilicate glass (for example, Pyrex (registered trademark) )), quartz glass (SiO 2 ), sapphire, ZrO 2 , Si 3 N 4 , AlN, piezoelectric, dielectric: BaTiO 3 , LiNbO 3 , SrTiO 3 , diamond, metal: Al, Ti, Fe, Cu, Ag , Au, Pt, Pd, Ta, Nb, etc.

 第1の基板及び第2の基板の材質としては、他にも樹脂:ポリジメチルシロキサン(PDMS)、エポキシ樹脂、フェノール樹脂、ポリイミド、ベンゾシクロブテン樹脂、ポリベンゾオキサゾールなどであってもよい。 The first substrate and the second substrate may be made of other resins such as polydimethylsiloxane (PDMS), epoxy resin, phenol resin, polyimide, benzocyclobutene resin, and polybenzoxazole.

 第1の基板及び第2の基板は、多層構造であってもよい。例えば、シリコン基板等の表面に酸化ケイ素、窒化ケイ素、SiCN(炭窒化ケイ素)等の無機物層が形成された構造、シリコン基板等の表面にポリイミド樹脂、ポリベンゾオキサゾール樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、シクロテン(Dow, Chem)、イミド架橋シロキサン樹脂、エポキシ変性シロキサンや、ポーラスシリカ、有機架橋シロキサン、ブラックダイヤモンド(アプライドマテルアルズ社)などの有機無機複合low-k等の有機物層が形成された構造、シリコン基板上に無機物及び有機物の複合体が形成された構造が挙げられる。 The first substrate and the second substrate may have a multilayer structure. For example, a structure in which an inorganic layer such as silicon oxide, silicon nitride, or SiCN (silicon carbonitride) is formed on the surface of a silicon substrate, etc., or a structure in which an inorganic layer such as silicon oxide, silicon nitride, SiCN (silicon carbonitride), etc. , Chem), imide cross-linked siloxane resin, epoxy-modified siloxane, porous silica, organic cross-linked siloxane, organic-inorganic composite low-k such as black diamond (Applied Materials), etc., on a silicon substrate. Another example is a structure in which a complex of inorganic and organic substances is formed.

 各材料は主な用途として、次のものに使用される。
 Siは、半導体メモリー、LSIの積層、CMOSイメージセンサー、MEMS封止、光学デバイス、LEDなど;
 SiOは、半導体メモリー、LSIの積層、MEMS封止、マイクロ流路、CMOSイメージセンサー、光学デバイス、LEDなど;
 PDMSは、マイクロ流路;
 InGaAlAs、InGaAs、InPは、光学デバイス;
 InGaAlAs、GaAs、GaNは、LEDなど。
Each material is mainly used for the following:
Si is used in semiconductor memories, LSI stacks, CMOS image sensors, MEMS encapsulation, optical devices, LEDs, etc.;
SiO 2 can be used for semiconductor memory, LSI stacking, MEMS sealing, microchannels, CMOS image sensors, optical devices, LEDs, etc.;
PDMS is a microchannel;
InGaAlAs, InGaAs, InP are optical devices;
InGaAlAs, GaAs, GaN, LED, etc.

 第1の基板及び第2の基板の厚さは、それぞれ独立に、0.5μm~1mmであることが好ましく、1μm~900μmであることがより好ましく、2μm~900μmであることがさらに好ましい。 The thickness of the first substrate and the second substrate is preferably 0.5 μm to 1 mm, more preferably 1 μm to 900 μm, and even more preferably 2 μm to 900 μm.

 第1の基板及び第2の基板の形状も特に制限されない。例えば、第1の基板及び第2の基板がシリコン基板の場合、層間絶縁層(Low-k膜)が形成されたシリコン基板であってもよく、また、シリコン基板には、微細な溝(凹部)、微細な貫通孔などが形成されていてもよい。 The shapes of the first substrate and the second substrate are also not particularly limited. For example, when the first substrate and the second substrate are silicon substrates, they may be silicon substrates on which an interlayer insulating layer (low-k film) is formed. ), fine through holes, etc. may be formed.

 本開示の基板積層体の製造方法では、接合強度の点から、第1の基板の第1の樹脂層と接触する側の面及び第2の基板の第2の樹脂層と接触する側の面の少なくとも一方に表面処理を行ってもよい。例えば、前述の表面処理を行うことで、水酸基、エポキシ基、カルボキシ基、アミノ基、及びメルカプト基からなる群より選ばれる少なくとも1種の官能基を形成してもよい。 In the method for manufacturing a substrate laminate of the present disclosure, from the viewpoint of bonding strength, the surface of the first substrate that contacts the first resin layer and the surface of the second substrate that contacts the second resin layer. You may perform surface treatment on at least one of them. For example, by performing the above-mentioned surface treatment, at least one functional group selected from the group consisting of a hydroxyl group, an epoxy group, a carboxy group, an amino group, and a mercapto group may be formed.

 前述の表面処理としては、例えば、プラズマ処理、薬品処理、紫外線(UV)オゾン処理等のオゾン処理などが挙げられる。 Examples of the above-mentioned surface treatment include plasma treatment, chemical treatment, and ozone treatment such as ultraviolet (UV) ozone treatment.

 水酸基は、第1の基板及び第2の基板の表面に、プラズマ処理、薬品処理、UVオゾン処理等のオゾン処理などの表面処理を行うことで、それらの表面にそれぞれ設けることができる。
 水酸基は、第1の基板又は第2の基板に含まれる、Si、Al、Ti、Zr、Hf、Fe、Ni、Cu、Ag、Au、Ga、Ge、Sn、Pd、As、Pt,Mg、In、Ta及びNbからなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の元素と結合した状態で存在することが好ましい。第1の基板の第1の樹脂層と接触する側の面及び第2の基板の第2の樹脂層と接触する側の面は、水酸基を含むシラノール基を有することが好ましい。
Hydroxyl groups can be provided on the surfaces of the first substrate and the second substrate by subjecting the surfaces to a surface treatment such as plasma treatment, chemical treatment, or ozone treatment such as UV ozone treatment.
The hydroxyl groups include Si, Al, Ti, Zr, Hf, Fe, Ni, Cu, Ag, Au, Ga, Ge, Sn, Pd, As, Pt, Mg, Preferably, it exists in a bonded state with at least one element selected from the group consisting of In, Ta, and Nb. It is preferable that the surface of the first substrate in contact with the first resin layer and the surface of the second substrate in contact with the second resin layer have silanol groups containing hydroxyl groups.

 エポキシ基は、第1の基板及び第2の基板の表面に、エポキシシランによるシランカップリング等の表面処理を行うことで、それらの表面にそれぞれ設けることができる。 The epoxy group can be provided on each of the surfaces of the first substrate and the second substrate by performing surface treatment such as silane coupling with epoxy silane.

 カルボキシ基は、第1の基板及び第2の基板の表面に、カルボキシシランによるシランカップリング等の表面処理を行うことで、それらの表面にそれぞれ設けることができる。 A carboxyl group can be provided on each of the surfaces of the first substrate and the second substrate by performing surface treatment such as silane coupling with carboxysilane.

 アミノ基は、第1の基板及び第2の基板の表面に、アミノシランによるシランカップリング等の表面処理を行うことで、それらの表面にそれぞれ設けることができる。 The amino group can be provided on each of the surfaces of the first substrate and the second substrate by performing surface treatment such as silane coupling with aminosilane.

 メルカプト基は、第1の基板及び第2の基板の表面に、メルカプトシランによるシランカップリング等の表面処理を行うことで、それらの表面にそれぞれ設けることができる。 The mercapto group can be provided on each of the surfaces of the first substrate and the second substrate by performing surface treatment such as silane coupling with mercaptosilane.

 また、接合強度を高める点から、第1の基板及び第2の基板の少なくとも一方の樹脂材料が付与される面にシランカップリング剤等のプライマーを成膜してもよい。 Furthermore, in order to increase the bonding strength, a primer such as a silane coupling agent may be formed on the surface of at least one of the first substrate and the second substrate to which the resin material is applied.

(第1の樹脂層及び第2の樹脂層)
 第1の樹脂層は、第1の基板の一方の表面に配置されている層であり、第2の樹脂層は、第2の基板の一方の表面に配置されている層である。例えば、第1の樹脂層及び第2の樹脂層は、第1の基板の一方の表面及び第2の基板の一方の表面に樹脂材料を含む樹脂組成物をそれぞれ付与し、形成された樹脂組成物層をそれぞれ硬化させることで形成される。
(First resin layer and second resin layer)
The first resin layer is a layer placed on one surface of the first substrate, and the second resin layer is a layer placed on one surface of the second substrate. For example, the first resin layer and the second resin layer are formed by applying a resin composition containing a resin material to one surface of the first substrate and one surface of the second substrate, respectively. It is formed by curing the respective layers.

 樹脂組成物に含まれる樹脂材料としては、特に限定されず、例えば、ポリイミド、ポリアミド、ポリアミドイミド、パリレン、ポリアリレンエーテル、テトラヒドロナフタレン、オクタヒドロアントラセン等の結合又は構造が架橋により形成される材料、ポリベンゾオキサザール、ポリベンゾオキサジン等の窒素環含有構造が形成される材料、Si-O等の結合又は構造が架橋により形成される材料、シロキサン変性化合物などの有機材料が挙げられる。
 第1の樹脂層の形成に用いられる樹脂材料及び第2の樹脂層の形成に用いられる樹脂材料は、同じであってもよく、異なっていてもよい。
The resin material contained in the resin composition is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include materials whose bond or structure is formed by crosslinking, such as polyimide, polyamide, polyamideimide, parylene, polyarylene ether, tetrahydronaphthalene, and octahydroanthracene. Examples include materials in which a nitrogen ring-containing structure is formed such as polybenzoxazal, polybenzoxazine, etc., materials in which a bond or structure is formed by crosslinking such as Si--O, and organic materials such as siloxane-modified compounds.
The resin material used to form the first resin layer and the resin material used to form the second resin layer may be the same or different.

 Si-O結合(シロキサン結合)を有する構造としては、例えば、以下に示す式(1)~式(3)で表される構造が挙げられる。 Examples of structures having Si—O bonds (siloxane bonds) include structures represented by formulas (1) to (3) shown below.

 Si-O結合(シロキサン結合)を有する構造にて、Siに結合する基が(アルキレン基、フェニレン基等で置換されていてもよい。例えば、(-O-)(R)Si-(R)-Si(R(-O-)等を有する構造(Rはメチル基等を表し、Rはアルキレン基、フェニレン基等を表す。x及びyはそれぞれ独立に0以上の整数であり、かつx+yは3である。)であってもよい。 In a structure having a Si-O bond (siloxane bond), the group bonding to Si may be substituted with an alkylene group, a phenylene group, etc. For example, (-O-) x (R 1 ) y Si- (R 2 )-Si(R 1 ) y (-O-) A structure having x , etc. (R 1 represents a methyl group, etc., R 2 represents an alkylene group, a phenylene group, etc. is an integer greater than or equal to 0, and x+y is 3).

 Si-O結合が架橋により形成される材料としては、例えば、以下に示す式(4)及び式(5)で表される化合物が挙げられる。また、式(1)及び式(2)で表される構造は、例えば、式(4)及び式(5)で表される化合物を加熱して反応させることで生成できる。 Examples of materials in which Si—O bonds are formed by crosslinking include compounds represented by the following formulas (4) and (5). Further, the structures represented by formulas (1) and (2) can be produced, for example, by heating and reacting the compounds represented by formulas (4) and (5).

 例えば、樹脂材料が、ポリイミド、ポリアミド、ポリアミドイミド等の結合又は構造が架橋により形成される材料を含む場合、1級窒素原子及び2級窒素原子の少なくとも1つを含むカチオン性官能基を有し、重量平均分子量が90以上40万以下である化合物(A)と、分子内に-C(=O)OX基(Xは、水素原子又は炭素数1以上6以下のアルキル基である)を3つ以上有し、3つ以上の-C(=O)OX基のうち、1つ以上6つ以下が-C(=O)OH基であり、重量平均分子量が200以上2000以下である架橋剤(B)と、を含むことが好ましい。 For example, when the resin material includes a material such as polyimide, polyamide, polyamideimide, etc. whose bond or structure is formed by crosslinking, the resin material has a cationic functional group containing at least one of a primary nitrogen atom and a secondary nitrogen atom. , a compound (A) having a weight average molecular weight of 90 to 400,000, and 3 -C(=O)OX groups (X is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms) in the molecule. A crosslinking agent having at least three -C(=O)OX groups, one or more of which are -C(=O)OH groups, and a weight average molecular weight of 200 or more and 2000 or less. It is preferable to include (B).

(化合物(A))
 化合物(A)は、1級窒素原子及び2級窒素原子の少なくとも1つを含むカチオン性官能基を有し、重量平均分子量が90以上40万以下である化合物である。カチオン性官能基としては、正電荷を帯びることができ、かつ1級窒素原子及び2級窒素原子の少なくとも1つを含む官能基であれば特に限定されない。
(Compound (A))
Compound (A) has a cationic functional group containing at least one of a primary nitrogen atom and a secondary nitrogen atom, and has a weight average molecular weight of 90 to 400,000. The cationic functional group is not particularly limited as long as it can be positively charged and contains at least one of a primary nitrogen atom and a secondary nitrogen atom.

 さらに、化合物(A)は、1級窒素原子及び2級窒素原子のほかに、3級窒素原子を含んでいてもよい。 Furthermore, the compound (A) may contain a tertiary nitrogen atom in addition to the primary nitrogen atom and the secondary nitrogen atom.

 本開示において、「1級窒素原子」とは、水素原子2つ及び水素原子以外の原子1つのみに結合している窒素原子(例えば、1級アミノ基(-NH基)に含まれる窒素原子)、又は、水素原子3つ及び水素原子以外の原子1つのみに結合している窒素原子(カチオン)を指す。
 また、「2級窒素原子」とは、水素原子1つ及び水素原子以外の原子2つのみに結合している窒素原子(即ち、下記式(a)で表される官能基に含まれる窒素原子)、又は、水素原子2つ及び水素原子以外の原子2つのみに結合している窒素原子(カチオン)を指す。
 また、「3級窒素原子」とは、水素原子以外の原子3つのみに結合している窒素原子(即ち、下記式(b)で表される官能基である窒素原子)、又は、水素原子1つ及び水素原子以外の原子3つのみに結合している窒素原子(カチオン)を指す。
In the present disclosure, a "primary nitrogen atom" refers to a nitrogen atom that is bonded to only two hydrogen atoms and one atom other than hydrogen atoms (for example, nitrogen contained in a primary amino group ( -NH2 group)). or a nitrogen atom (cation) bonded to only three hydrogen atoms and one non-hydrogen atom.
In addition, "secondary nitrogen atom" refers to a nitrogen atom that is bonded to only one hydrogen atom and two atoms other than hydrogen atoms (i.e., a nitrogen atom contained in a functional group represented by the following formula (a)). ), or a nitrogen atom (cation) bonded only to two hydrogen atoms and two atoms other than hydrogen atoms.
Furthermore, a "tertiary nitrogen atom" refers to a nitrogen atom that is bonded to only three atoms other than hydrogen atoms (i.e., a nitrogen atom that is a functional group represented by the following formula (b)), or a hydrogen atom. Refers to a nitrogen atom (cation) that is bonded to only one and three atoms other than hydrogen atoms.

 式(a)及び式(b)において、*は、水素原子以外の原子との結合位置を示す。
 ここで、前記式(a)で表される官能基は、2級アミノ基(-NHR基;ここで、Rはアルキル基を表す)の一部を構成する官能基であってもよいし、ポリマーの骨格中に含まれる2価の連結基であってもよい。
 また、前記式(b)で表される官能基(即ち、3級窒素原子)は、3級アミノ基(-NR基;ここで、R及びRは、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基を表す)の一部を構成する官能基であってもよいし、ポリマーの骨格中に含まれる3価の連結基であってもよい。
In formulas (a) and (b), * indicates a bonding position with an atom other than a hydrogen atom.
Here, the functional group represented by the formula (a) may be a functional group that constitutes a part of a secondary amino group (-NHR a group; here, R a represents an alkyl group). However, it may also be a divalent linking group contained in the backbone of the polymer.
In addition, the functional group (i.e., tertiary nitrogen atom) represented by the formula (b) is a tertiary amino group (-NR b R c group; where R b and R c each independently represent an alkyl It may be a functional group constituting a part of (representing a group), or it may be a trivalent linking group contained in the skeleton of the polymer.

 化合物(A)の重量平均分子量は、90以上40万以下である。化合物(A)としては、例えば、脂肪族アミン、シロキサン結合(Si-O結合)とアミノ基とを有する化合物、分子内にSi-O結合を有さず、環構造を有するアミン化合物等が挙げられる。化合物(A)が脂肪族アミンの場合、重量平均分子量は1万以上20万以下であることが好ましい。化合物(A)がシロキサン結合(Si-O結合)とアミノ基とを有する化合物の場合、重量平均分子量は130以上10000以下であることが好ましく、130以上5000以下であることがより好ましく、130以上2000以下であることがさらに好ましい。化合物(A)が分子内にSi-O結合を有さず、環構造を有するアミン化合物の場合、重量平均分子量は90以上600以下が好ましい。 The weight average molecular weight of compound (A) is 90 or more and 400,000 or less. Examples of the compound (A) include aliphatic amines, compounds having a siloxane bond (Si-O bond) and an amino group, and amine compounds having a ring structure without having an Si-O bond in the molecule. It will be done. When compound (A) is an aliphatic amine, the weight average molecular weight is preferably 10,000 or more and 200,000 or less. When the compound (A) is a compound having a siloxane bond (Si-O bond) and an amino group, the weight average molecular weight is preferably 130 or more and 10,000 or less, more preferably 130 or more and 5,000 or less, and 130 or more. More preferably, it is 2000 or less. When the compound (A) is an amine compound that does not have a Si—O bond in its molecule and has a ring structure, the weight average molecular weight is preferably 90 or more and 600 or less.

 なお、本開示において、重量平均分子量は、モノマー以外について、GPC(Gel Permeation Chromatography)法によって測定された、ポリエチレングリコール換算の重量平均分子量を指す。
 具体的には、重量平均分子量は、展開溶媒として硝酸ナトリウム濃度0.1mol/Lの水溶液を用い、分析装置Shodex DET RI-101及び2種類の分析カラム(東ソー製 TSKgel G6000PWXL-CP及びTSKgel G3000PWXL-CP)を用いて流速1.0mL/minで屈折率を検出し、ポリエチレングリコール/ポリエチレンオキサイドを標準品として解析ソフト(Waters製 Empower3)にて算出される。
Note that in the present disclosure, the weight average molecular weight refers to the weight average molecular weight in terms of polyethylene glycol measured by GPC (Gel Permeation Chromatography) method for other than monomers.
Specifically, the weight average molecular weight was determined using an aqueous solution with a sodium nitrate concentration of 0.1 mol/L as a developing solvent, an analyzer Shodex DET RI-101, and two types of analytical columns (TSKgel G6000PWXL-CP and TSKgel G3000PWXL- manufactured by Tosoh). CP) at a flow rate of 1.0 mL/min, and the refractive index is calculated using analysis software (Empower 3 manufactured by Waters) using polyethylene glycol/polyethylene oxide as a standard product.

 また、化合物(A)は、必要に応じて、アニオン性官能基、ノニオン性官能基等をさらに有していてもよい。
 前記ノニオン性官能基は、水素結合受容基であっても、水素結合供与基であってもよい。前記ノニオン性官能基としては、例えば、ヒドロキシ基、カルボニル基、エーテル基(-O-)、等を挙げることができる。
 前記アニオン性官能基は、負電荷を帯びることができる官能基であれば特に制限はない。前記アニオン性官能基としては、例えば、カルボン酸基、スルホン酸基、硫酸基等を挙げることができる。
Moreover, the compound (A) may further have an anionic functional group, a nonionic functional group, etc. as necessary.
The nonionic functional group may be a hydrogen bond accepting group or a hydrogen bond donating group. Examples of the nonionic functional group include a hydroxy group, a carbonyl group, an ether group (-O-), and the like.
The anionic functional group is not particularly limited as long as it can be negatively charged. Examples of the anionic functional group include a carboxylic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, and a sulfuric acid group.

 化合物(A)としては、脂肪族アミンが挙げられるが、より具体的には、エチレンイミン、プロピレンイミン、ブチレンイミン、ペンチレンイミン、ヘキシレンイミン、ヘプチレンイミン、オクチレンイミン、トリメチレンイミン、テトラメチレンイミン、ペンタメチレンイミン、ヘキサメチレンイミン、オクタメチレンイミンなどのアルキレンイミンの重合体であるポリアルキレンイミン;ポリアリルアミン;ポリアクリルアミドが挙げられる。 Compound (A) includes aliphatic amines, more specifically ethyleneimine, propyleneimine, butyleneimine, pentyleneimine, hexyleneimine, heptyleneimine, octyleneimine, trimethyleneimine, tetramethyleneimine, Examples include polyalkyleneimine, which is a polymer of alkyleneimine such as pentamethyleneimine, hexamethyleneimine, and octamethyleneimine; polyallylamine; and polyacrylamide.

 ポリエチレンイミン(PEI)は、特公昭43-8828号公報、特公昭49-33120号公報、特開2001-213958号公報、国際公開第2010/137711号パンフレット等に記載の公知の方法によって、製造することができる。ポリエチレンイミン以外のポリアルキレンイミンについても、ポリエチレンイミンと同様の方法により製造できる。 Polyethyleneimine (PEI) is produced by a known method described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 43-8828, Japanese Patent Publication No. 49-33120, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2001-213958, International Publication No. 2010/137711 pamphlet, etc. be able to. Polyalkyleneimines other than polyethyleneimine can also be produced by the same method as polyethyleneimine.

 化合物(A)は、上述したポリアルキレンイミンの誘導体(ポリアルキレンイミン誘導体;特に好ましくはポリエチレンイミン誘導体)であることも好ましい。ポリアルキレンイミン誘導体としては、上記ポリアルキレンイミンを用いて製造可能な化合物であれば特に制限はない。具体的には、ポリアルキレンイミンにアルキル基(好ましくは炭素数1~10のアルキル基)、アリール基等を導入したポリアルキレンイミン誘導体、ポリアルキレンイミンに水酸基等の架橋性基を導入して得られるポリアルキレンイミン誘導体等を挙げることができる。
 これらのポリアルキレンイミン誘導体は、上記ポリアルキレンイミンを用いて通常行われる方法により製造することができる。具体的には例えば、特開平6―016809号公報等に記載の方法に準拠して製造することができる。
It is also preferable that the compound (A) is a derivative of the above-mentioned polyalkyleneimine (polyalkyleneimine derivative; particularly preferably polyethyleneimine derivative). The polyalkylene imine derivative is not particularly limited as long as it is a compound that can be produced using the above polyalkylene imine. Specifically, polyalkyleneimine derivatives are obtained by introducing an alkyl group (preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms), an aryl group, etc. into polyalkyleneimine, and polyalkyleneimine derivatives obtained by introducing a crosslinkable group such as a hydroxyl group into polyalkyleneimine. Examples include polyalkyleneimine derivatives.
These polyalkylene imine derivatives can be produced by a conventional method using the above polyalkylene imine. Specifically, it can be produced, for example, in accordance with the method described in JP-A-6-016809.

 また、ポリアルキレンイミン誘導体としては、ポリアルキレンイミンに対してカチオン性官能基含有モノマーを反応させることにより、ポリアルキレンイミンの分岐度を向上させて得られた高分岐型のポリアルキレンイミンも好ましい。
 高分岐型のポリアルキレンイミンを得る方法としては、例えば、骨格中に複数の2級窒素原子を有するポリアルキレンイミンに対してカチオン性官能基含有モノマーを反応させ、前記複数の2級窒素原子のうちの少なくとも1つをカチオン性官能基含有モノマーによって置換する方法、末端に複数の1級窒素原子を有するポリアルキレンイミンに対してカチオン性官能基含有モノマーを反応させ、前記複数の1級窒素原子のうちの少なくとも1つをカチオン性官能基含有モノマーによって置換する方法等、が挙げられる。
 分岐度を向上するために導入されるカチオン性官能基としては、アミノエチル基、アミノプロピル基、ジアミノプロピル基、アミノブチル基、ジアミノブチル基、トリアミノブチル基等を挙げることができるが、カチオン性官能基当量を小さくしカチオン性官能基密度を大きくする点から、アミノエチル基が好ましい。
Further, as the polyalkylene imine derivative, a highly branched polyalkylene imine obtained by increasing the degree of branching of the polyalkylene imine by reacting the polyalkylene imine with a monomer containing a cationic functional group is also preferable.
As a method for obtaining a highly branched polyalkylene imine, for example, a polyalkylene imine having a plurality of secondary nitrogen atoms in its skeleton is reacted with a cationic functional group-containing monomer, and the plurality of secondary nitrogen atoms are A method of substituting at least one of them with a cationic functional group-containing monomer, a method in which a polyalkylene imine having a plurality of primary nitrogen atoms at the terminal is reacted with a cationic functional group-containing monomer, and the plurality of primary nitrogen atoms Examples include a method of replacing at least one of them with a cationic functional group-containing monomer.
Examples of the cationic functional group introduced to improve the degree of branching include aminoethyl group, aminopropyl group, diaminopropyl group, aminobutyl group, diaminobutyl group, triaminobutyl group, etc. An aminoethyl group is preferred from the viewpoint of reducing the functional group equivalent weight and increasing the cationic functional group density.

 また、前記ポリエチレンイミン及びその誘導体は、市販のものであってもよい。例えば、株式会社日本触媒、BASF社、MP-Biomedicals社等から市販されているポリエチレンイミン及びその誘導体から、適宜選択して用いることもできる。 Furthermore, the polyethyleneimine and its derivatives may be commercially available. For example, polyethyleneimine and its derivatives commercially available from Nippon Shokubai Co., Ltd., BASF, MP-Biomedicals, etc. can be appropriately selected and used.

 化合物(A)としては、前述の脂肪族アミンのほかに、Si-O結合とアミノ基とを有する化合物が挙げられる。Si-O結合とアミノ基とを有する化合物としては、例えば、シロキサンジアミン、アミノ基を有するシランカップリング剤、アミノ基を有するシランカップリング剤のシロキサン重合体などが挙げられる。
 アミノ基を有するシランカップリング剤としては、例えば下記式(A-3)で表される化合物が挙げられる。
Examples of the compound (A) include, in addition to the aforementioned aliphatic amines, compounds having an Si--O bond and an amino group. Examples of the compound having an Si--O bond and an amino group include siloxane diamine, a silane coupling agent having an amino group, and a siloxane polymer of a silane coupling agent having an amino group.
Examples of the silane coupling agent having an amino group include a compound represented by the following formula (A-3).

 式(A-3)中、Rは置換されていてもよい炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表す。R及びRは、それぞれ独立に、置換(骨格にカルボニル基、エーテル基等を含んでもよい)されていてもよい炭素数1~12のアルキレン基、エーテル基又はカルボニル基を表す。R及びRは、それぞれ独立に、置換されていてもよい炭素数1~4のアルキレン基又は単結合を表す。Arは2価又は3価の芳香環を表す。Xは水素又は置換されていてもよい炭素数1~5のアルキル基を表す。Xは水素、シクロアルキル基、ヘテロ環基、アリール基又は置換(骨格にカルボニル基、エーテル基等を含んでもよい)されていてもよい炭素数1~5のアルキル基、を表す。複数のR、R、R、R、R、Xは同じであっても異なっていてもよい。
 R、R、R、R、R、X、Xにおけるアルキル基及びアルキレン基の置換基としては、それぞれ独立に、アミノ基、ヒドロキシ基、アルコキシ基、シアノ基、カルボン酸基、スルホン酸基、ハロゲン等が挙げられる。
 Arにおける2価又は3価の芳香環としては、例えば、2価又は3価のベンゼン環が挙げられる。Xにおけるアリール基としては、例えば、フェニル基、メチルベンジル基、ビニルベンジル基等が挙げられる。
In formula (A-3), R 1 represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. R 2 and R 3 each independently represent an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, an ether group, or a carbonyl group, which may be substituted (the skeleton may contain a carbonyl group, ether group, etc.). R 4 and R 5 each independently represent an optionally substituted alkylene group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms or a single bond. Ar represents a divalent or trivalent aromatic ring. X 1 represents hydrogen or an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms. X 2 represents hydrogen, a cycloalkyl group, a heterocyclic group, an aryl group, or an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms (the skeleton may include a carbonyl group, an ether group, etc.). A plurality of R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , and X 1 may be the same or different.
Substituents for the alkyl group and alkylene group in R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , X 1 , and X 2 each independently include an amino group, a hydroxy group, an alkoxy group, a cyano group, and a carboxylic acid group. group, sulfonic acid group, halogen, etc.
Examples of the divalent or trivalent aromatic ring in Ar include a divalent or trivalent benzene ring. Examples of the aryl group for X 2 include phenyl group, methylbenzyl group, vinylbenzyl group, and the like.

 式(A-3)で表されるシランカップリング剤の具体例としては、例えば、N-(2-アミノエチル)-3-アミノプロピルメチルジエトキシシラン、N-(2-アミノエチル)-3-アミノプロピルトリエトキシシラン、N-(2-アミノエチル)-3-アミノイソブチルジメチルメトキシシラン、N-(2-アミノエチル)-3-アミノイソブチルメチルジメトキシシラン、N-(2-アミノエチル)-11-アミノウンデシルトリメトキシシラン、3-アミノプロピルトリメトキシシラン、3-アミノプロピルトリエトキシシラン、N-フェニル-3-アミノプロピルトリメトキシシラン、(アミノエチルアミノエチル)フェニルトリエトキシシラン、メチルベンジルアミノエチルアミノプロピルトリメトキシシラン、ベンジルアミノエチルアミノプロピルトリエトキシシラン、3-ウレイドプロピルトリエトキシシラン、(アミノエチルアミノエチル)フェネチルトリメトキシシラン、(アミノエチルアミノメチル)フェネチルトリメトキシシラン、N-[2-[3-(トリメトキシシリル)プロピルアミノ]エチル]エチレンジアミン、3-アミノプロピルジエトキシメチルシラン、3-アミノプロピルジメトキシメチルシラン、3-アミノプロピルジメチルエトキシシラン、3-アミノプロピルジメチルメトキシシラン、トリメトキシ[2-(2-アミノエチル)-3-アミノプロピル]シラン、ジアミノメチルメチルジエトキシシラン、メチルアミノメチルメチルジエトキシシラン、p-アミノフェニルトリメトキシシラン、N-メチルアミノプロピルトリエトキシシラン、N-メチルアミノプロピルメチルジエトキシシラン、(フェニルアミノメチル)メチルジエトキシシラン、アセトアミドプロピルトリメトキシシラン、及びこれらの加水分解物が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the silane coupling agent represented by formula (A-3) include N-(2-aminoethyl)-3-aminopropylmethyldiethoxysilane, N-(2-aminoethyl)-3 -Aminopropyltriethoxysilane, N-(2-aminoethyl)-3-aminoisobutyldimethylmethoxysilane, N-(2-aminoethyl)-3-aminoisobutylmethyldimethoxysilane, N-(2-aminoethyl)- 11-aminoundecyltrimethoxysilane, 3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-aminopropyltriethoxysilane, N-phenyl-3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, (aminoethylaminoethyl)phenyltriethoxysilane, methylbenzyl Aminoethylaminopropyltrimethoxysilane, benzylaminoethylaminopropyltriethoxysilane, 3-ureidopropyltriethoxysilane, (aminoethylaminoethyl)phenethyltrimethoxysilane, (aminoethylaminomethyl)phenethyltrimethoxysilane, N-[ 2-[3-(trimethoxysilyl)propylamino]ethyl]ethylenediamine, 3-aminopropyldiethoxymethylsilane, 3-aminopropyldimethoxymethylsilane, 3-aminopropyldimethylethoxysilane, 3-aminopropyldimethylmethoxysilane, trimethoxy[2-(2-aminoethyl)-3-aminopropyl]silane, diaminomethylmethyldiethoxysilane, methylaminomethylmethyldiethoxysilane, p-aminophenyltrimethoxysilane, N-methylaminopropyltriethoxysilane, Examples include N-methylaminopropylmethyldiethoxysilane, (phenylaminomethyl)methyldiethoxysilane, acetamidopropyltrimethoxysilane, and hydrolysates thereof.

 式(A-3)以外のアミノ基を含むシランカップリング剤としては、例えば、N,N-ビス[3-(トリメトキシシリル)プロピル]エチレンジアミン、N,N’-ビス[3-(トリメトキシシリル)プロピル]エチレンジアミン、ビス[(3-トリエトキシシリル)プロピル]アミン、ピペラジニルプロピルメチルジメトキシシラン、ビス[3-(トリエトキシシリル)プロピル]ウレア、ビス(メチルジエトキシシリルプロピル)アミン、2,2-ジメトキシ-1,6-ジアザ―2-シラシクロオクタン、3,5-ジアミノ-N-(4-(メトキシジメチルシリル)フェニル)ベンズアミド、3,5-ジアミノ-N-(4-(トリエトキシシリル)フェニル)ベンズアミド、5-(エトキシジメチルシリル)ベンゼン-1,3-ジアミン、及びこれらの加水分解物が挙げられる。 Examples of the silane coupling agent containing an amino group other than formula (A-3) include N,N-bis[3-(trimethoxysilyl)propyl]ethylenediamine, N,N'-bis[3-(trimethoxysilyl)propyl] silyl)propyl]ethylenediamine, bis[(3-triethoxysilyl)propyl]amine, piperazinylpropylmethyldimethoxysilane, bis[3-(triethoxysilyl)propyl]urea, bis(methyldiethoxysilylpropyl)amine, 2,2-dimethoxy-1,6-diaza-2-silacyclooctane, 3,5-diamino-N-(4-(methoxydimethylsilyl)phenyl)benzamide, 3,5-diamino-N-(4-( Examples include triethoxysilyl)phenyl)benzamide, 5-(ethoxydimethylsilyl)benzene-1,3-diamine, and hydrolysates thereof.

 前述のアミノ基を有するシランカップリング剤は、1種を単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を組み合わせて用いてもよい。また、アミノ基を有するシランカップリング剤と、アミノ基を有しないシランカップリング剤とを組み合わせて用いてもよい。例えば、金属との密着性改善のためメルカプト基を有するシランカップリング剤を用いてもよい。 The aforementioned silane coupling agents having an amino group may be used alone or in combination of two or more. Furthermore, a silane coupling agent having an amino group and a silane coupling agent not having an amino group may be used in combination. For example, a silane coupling agent having a mercapto group may be used to improve adhesion to metals.

 また、これらのシランカップリング剤から、シロキサン結合(Si-O-Si)を介して形成される重合体(シロキサン重合体)を用いてもよい。例えば、3-アミノプロピルトリメトキシシランの加水分解物からは、線形シロキサン構造を有する重合体、分岐状シロキサン構造を有する重合体、環状シロキサン構造を有する重合体、かご状シロキサン構造を有する重合体等が得られる。かご状シロキサン構造は、例えば、下記式(A-1)で表される。 Furthermore, a polymer (siloxane polymer) formed from these silane coupling agents via a siloxane bond (Si-O-Si) may be used. For example, from the hydrolyzate of 3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, a polymer having a linear siloxane structure, a polymer having a branched siloxane structure, a polymer having a cyclic siloxane structure, a polymer having a cage-shaped siloxane structure, etc. is obtained. The cage-like siloxane structure is represented by the following formula (A-1), for example.

 シロキサンジアミンとしては、例えば、下記式(A-2)で表される化合物が挙げられる。なお、式(A-2)中、iは0~4の整数、jは1~3の整数、Meはメチル基である。 Examples of the siloxane diamine include a compound represented by the following formula (A-2). In formula (A-2), i is an integer of 0 to 4, j is an integer of 1 to 3, and Me is a methyl group.

 また、シロキサンジアミンとしては、1,3-ビス(3-アミノプロピル)テトラメチルジシロキサン(式(A-2)において、i=0、j=1)、1,3-ビス(2-アミノエチルアミノ)プロピルテトラメチルジシロキサン(式(A-2)において、i=1、j=1)が挙げられる。 Further, as the siloxane diamine, 1,3-bis(3-aminopropyl)tetramethyldisiloxane (in formula (A-2), i=0, j=1), 1,3-bis(2-aminoethyl Examples include amino)propyltetramethyldisiloxane (in formula (A-2), i=1, j=1).

 化合物(A)としては、前述の脂肪族アミン、及びSi-O結合とアミノ基とを有する化合物の他に、分子内にSi-O結合を有さず、環構造を有するアミン化合物が挙げられる。中でも、分子内にSi-O結合を有さず、環構造を有する重量平均分子量90以上600以下のアミン化合物が好ましい。分子内にSi-O結合を有さず、環構造を有する重量平均分子量90以上600以下のアミン化合物としては、脂環式アミン、芳香環アミン、複素環(ヘテロ環)アミン等が挙げられる。分子内に複数の環構造を有していてもよく、複数の環構造は、同じであっても異なっていてもよい。環構造を有するアミン化合物としては、熱的に、より安定な化合物が得られ易いため、芳香環を有する化合物がより好ましい。
 また、分子内にSi-O結合を有さず、環構造を有する重量平均分子量90以上600以下のアミン化合物としては、架橋剤(B)とともにアミド、アミドイミド、イミドなどの熱架橋構造を形成し易く、耐熱性を高めることができる点から、1級アミノ基を有する化合物が好ましい。さらに、前述のアミン化合物としては、架橋剤(B)とともにアミド、アミドイミド、イミドなどの熱架橋構造の数を多くし易く、耐熱性をより高めることができる点から、1級アミノ基を2つ有するジアミン化合物、1級アミノ基を3つ有するトリアミン化合物等が好ましい。
Examples of the compound (A) include, in addition to the aforementioned aliphatic amines and compounds having an Si-O bond and an amino group, amine compounds that do not have a Si-O bond in the molecule and have a ring structure. . Among these, amine compounds having a ring structure and having a weight average molecular weight of 90 or more and 600 or less are preferred, and do not have a Si--O bond in the molecule. Examples of the amine compound having a ring structure and having a weight average molecular weight of 90 or more and 600 or less without having an Si--O bond in the molecule include alicyclic amines, aromatic ring amines, heterocyclic amines, and the like. The molecule may have multiple ring structures, and the multiple ring structures may be the same or different. As the amine compound having a ring structure, a compound having an aromatic ring is more preferable because a more thermally stable compound is easily obtained.
In addition, as an amine compound having a ring structure and having a weight average molecular weight of 90 or more and 600 or less, which does not have a Si-O bond in the molecule, it may form a thermally crosslinked structure such as amide, amide-imide, or imide together with the crosslinking agent (B). Compounds having a primary amino group are preferred because they are easy to use and can improve heat resistance. Furthermore, as for the above-mentioned amine compound, two primary amino groups are used because it is easy to increase the number of thermally crosslinked structures such as amide, amide-imide, imide, etc. together with the crosslinking agent (B), and the heat resistance can be further improved. Diamine compounds having three primary amino groups, triamine compounds having three primary amino groups, and the like are preferred.

 脂環式アミンとしては、例えば、シクロヘキシルアミン、ジメチルアミノシクロヘキサンなどが挙げられる。
 芳香環アミンとしては、例えば、ジアミノジフェニルエーテル、キシレンジアミン(好ましくはパラキシレンジアミン)、ジアミノベンゼン、ジアミノトルエン、メチレンジアニリン、ジメチルジアミノビフェニル、ビス(トリフルオロメチル)ジアミノビフェニル、ジアミノベンゾフェノン、ジアミノベンズアニリド、ビス(アミノフェニル)フルオレン、ビス(アミノフェノキシ)ベンゼン、ビス(アミノフェノキシ)ビフェニル、ジカルボキシジアミノジフェニルメタン、ジアミノレゾルシン、ジヒドロキシベンジジン、ジアミノベンジジン、1,3,5-トリアミノフェノキシベンゼン、2,2’-ジメチルベンジジン、トリス(4-アミノフェニル)アミン、2,7-ジアミノフルオレン、1,9-ジアミノフルオレン、ジベンジルアミンなどが挙げられる。
 複素環アミンの複素環としては、ヘテロ原子として硫黄原子を含む複素環(例えば、チオフェン環)、又は、ヘテロ原子として窒素原子を含む複素環(例えば、ピロール環、ピロリジン環、ピラゾール環、イミダゾール環、トリアゾール環等の5員環;イソシアヌル環、ピリジン環、ピリダジン環、ピリミジン環、ピラジン環、ピペリジン環、ピペラジン環、トリアジン環等の6員環;インドール環、インドリン環、キノリン環、アクリジン環、ナフチリジン環、キナゾリン環、プリン環、キノキサリン環等の縮合環等)などが挙げられる。
 例えば、窒素を含有する複素環を有する複素環アミンとしては、メラミン、アンメリン、メラム、メレム、トリス(4-アミノフェニル)アミンなどが挙げられる。
 さらに、複素環と芳香環の両方を有するアミン化合物としては、N2,N4,N6-トリス(4-アミノフェニル)-1,3,5-トリアジン-2,4,6-トリアミンなどが挙げられる。
Examples of the alicyclic amine include cyclohexylamine and dimethylaminocyclohexane.
Examples of aromatic ring amines include diaminodiphenyl ether, xylene diamine (preferably paraxylene diamine), diaminobenzene, diaminotoluene, methylene dianiline, dimethyldiaminobiphenyl, bis(trifluoromethyl)diaminobiphenyl, diaminobenzophenone, and diaminobenzanilide. , bis(aminophenyl)fluorene, bis(aminophenoxy)benzene, bis(aminophenoxy)biphenyl, dicarboxydiaminodiphenylmethane, diaminoresorcin, dihydroxybenzidine, diaminobenzidine, 1,3,5-triaminophenoxybenzene, 2,2 Examples include '-dimethylbenzidine, tris(4-aminophenyl)amine, 2,7-diaminofluorene, 1,9-diaminofluorene, and dibenzylamine.
The heterocycle of the heterocyclic amine includes a heterocycle containing a sulfur atom as a heteroatom (for example, a thiophene ring), or a heterocycle containing a nitrogen atom as a heteroatom (for example, a pyrrole ring, a pyrrolidine ring, a pyrazole ring, an imidazole ring). , 5-membered rings such as triazole ring; 6-membered rings such as isocyanuric ring, pyridine ring, pyridazine ring, pyrimidine ring, pyrazine ring, piperidine ring, piperazine ring, triazine ring; indole ring, indoline ring, quinoline ring, acridine ring, fused rings such as a naphthyridine ring, a quinazoline ring, a purine ring, a quinoxaline ring, etc.).
For example, examples of the heterocyclic amine having a nitrogen-containing heterocycle include melamine, ammeline, melam, melem, tris(4-aminophenyl)amine, and the like.
Furthermore, examples of amine compounds having both a heterocycle and an aromatic ring include N2,N4,N6-tris(4-aminophenyl)-1,3,5-triazine-2,4,6-triamine.

 化合物(A)は、一級又は二級のアミノ基を有するため、第1基板及び第2基板の表面に存在し得る水酸基、エポキシ基、カルボキシ基、アミノ基、メルカプト基等の官能基との静電相互作用により、又は、前記官能基との共有結合を密に形成することにより、基板同士を強く接着することができる。
 また、化合物(A)は、一級又は二級のアミノ基を有するため、後述の極性溶媒(D)に容易に溶解する。極性溶媒(D)に容易に溶解する化合物(A)を用いることで、シリコン基板などの基板の親水性表面との親和性が高くなるため、平滑な膜を形成しやすく、第1の樹脂層及び第2の樹脂層の厚さを薄くすることができる。
Since the compound (A) has a primary or secondary amino group, it does not interact with functional groups such as hydroxyl groups, epoxy groups, carboxy groups, amino groups, and mercapto groups that may exist on the surfaces of the first substrate and the second substrate. The substrates can be strongly bonded to each other by electrical interaction or by forming a close covalent bond with the functional group.
Moreover, since the compound (A) has a primary or secondary amino group, it easily dissolves in the polar solvent (D) described below. By using a compound (A) that is easily soluble in a polar solvent (D), it has a high affinity with the hydrophilic surface of a substrate such as a silicon substrate, making it easier to form a smooth film and making it easier to form a smooth film. And the thickness of the second resin layer can be reduced.

 化合物(A)としては、平滑な薄膜形成の点より、脂肪族アミン又はSi-O結合とアミノ基とを有する化合物が好ましく、耐熱性の点よりSi-O結合とアミノ基とを有する化合物がより好ましい。 As the compound (A), from the viewpoint of forming a smooth thin film, an aliphatic amine or a compound having an Si-O bond and an amino group is preferable, and from the viewpoint of heat resistance, a compound having an Si-O bond and an amino group is preferable. More preferred.

 化合物(A)がSi-O結合とアミノ基とを有する化合物を含む場合には、化合物(A)中の1級窒素原子及び2級窒素原子の合計数と、ケイ素原子の数との比率(1級窒素原子及び2級窒素原子の合計数/ケイ素原子の数)が0.2以上5以下であると、平滑な薄膜形成の点から好ましい。 When the compound (A) contains a compound having an Si-O bond and an amino group, the ratio of the total number of primary nitrogen atoms and secondary nitrogen atoms to the number of silicon atoms in the compound (A) ( It is preferable that the ratio (total number of primary nitrogen atoms and secondary nitrogen atoms/number of silicon atoms) is 0.2 or more and 5 or less from the viewpoint of forming a smooth thin film.

 化合物(A)がSi-O結合とアミノ基とを有する化合物を含む場合には、基板同士の接着性の点より、Si-O結合とアミノ基とを有する化合物において、Siに結合するメチル基などの非架橋性基がモル比で、(非架橋性基)/Si<2の関係を満たすことが好ましい。この関係を満たすことにより、形成される膜の架橋(Si-O-Si結合とアミド結合、イミド結合等との架橋)密度が向上し、基板同士が十分な接着力を有し、基板の剥離を抑制できると推測される。 When the compound (A) contains a compound having an Si-O bond and an amino group, from the viewpoint of adhesion between substrates, the methyl group bonded to Si in the compound having an Si-O bond and an amino group is It is preferable that the molar ratio of non-crosslinkable groups such as (non-crosslinkable group)/Si<2 is satisfied. By satisfying this relationship, the density of crosslinking (crosslinking between Si-O-Si bonds and amide bonds, imide bonds, etc.) of the formed film increases, the substrates have sufficient adhesive strength, and the substrates can be peeled off. It is assumed that this can be suppressed.

 前述のように、化合物(A)は、1級窒素原子及び2級窒素原子の少なくとも1つを含むカチオン性官能基を有する。ここで、化合物(A)が1級窒素原子を含む場合には、化合物(A)中の全窒素原子中に占める1級窒素原子の割合が20モル%以上であることが好ましく、25モル%以上であることがより好ましく、30モル%以上であることがさらに好ましい。また、化合物(A)は、1級窒素原子を含み、かつ1級窒素原子以外の窒素原子(例えば、2級窒素原子、3級窒素原子)を含まないカチオン性官能基を有していてもよい。 As mentioned above, compound (A) has a cationic functional group containing at least one of a primary nitrogen atom and a secondary nitrogen atom. Here, when the compound (A) contains a primary nitrogen atom, the proportion of the primary nitrogen atom in the total nitrogen atoms in the compound (A) is preferably 20 mol% or more, and 25 mol% It is more preferable that it is above, and even more preferable that it is 30 mol% or more. Further, the compound (A) may have a cationic functional group that contains a primary nitrogen atom and does not contain any nitrogen atoms other than the primary nitrogen atom (e.g., a secondary nitrogen atom, a tertiary nitrogen atom). good.

 また、化合物(A)が2級窒素原子を含む場合には、化合物(A)中の全窒素原子中に占める2級窒素原子の割合が5モル%以上50モル%以下であることが好ましく、10モル%以上45モル%以下であることがより好ましい。 Further, when the compound (A) contains a secondary nitrogen atom, the proportion of the secondary nitrogen atom in the total nitrogen atoms in the compound (A) is preferably 5 mol% or more and 50 mol% or less, More preferably, it is 10 mol% or more and 45 mol% or less.

 また、化合物(A)は、1級窒素原子及び2級窒素原子のほかに、3級窒素原子を含んでいてよく、化合物(A)が3級窒素原子を含む場合には、化合物(A)中の全窒素原子中に占める3級窒素原子の割合が20モル%以上50モル%以下であることが好ましく、25モル%以上45モル%以下であることがより好ましい。 In addition, the compound (A) may contain a tertiary nitrogen atom in addition to the primary nitrogen atom and the secondary nitrogen atom, and when the compound (A) contains a tertiary nitrogen atom, the compound (A) The proportion of tertiary nitrogen atoms in the total nitrogen atoms in the carbon fiber is preferably 20 mol% or more and 50 mol% or less, and more preferably 25 mol% or more and 45 mol% or less.

 本開示において、第1の樹脂層中又は第2の樹脂層中における化合物(A)由来の成分の含有量は、特に制限されず、例えば、第1の樹脂層全体又は第2の樹脂層全体に対して1質量%以上82質量%以下とすることができ、5質量%以上82質量%以下であることが好ましく、13質量%以上82質量%以下であることがより好ましい。 In the present disclosure, the content of the component derived from the compound (A) in the first resin layer or the second resin layer is not particularly limited, and for example, the content of the component derived from the compound (A) in the first resin layer or the second resin layer is not particularly limited. The content can be 1% by mass or more and 82% by mass or less, preferably 5% by mass or more and 82% by mass or less, and more preferably 13% by mass or more and 82% by mass or less.

(架橋剤(B))
 架橋剤(B)は、分子内に-C(=O)OX基(Xは、水素原子又は炭素数1以上6以下のアルキル基である)を3つ以上有し、3つ以上の-C(=O)OX基(以下、「COOX」とも称する。)のうち、1つ以上6つ以下が-C(=O)OH基(以下、「COOH」とも称する。)であり、重量平均分子量が200以上2000以下である化合物である。
(Crosslinking agent (B))
The crosslinking agent (B) has three or more -C(=O)OX groups (X is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 or more and 6 or less carbon atoms) in the molecule, and has 3 or more -C Among the (=O)OX groups (hereinafter also referred to as "COOX"), one or more and six or less are -C(=O)OH groups (hereinafter also referred to as "COOH"), and the weight average molecular weight is 200 or more and 2000 or less.

 架橋剤(B)は、分子内に-C(=O)OX基(Xは、水素原子又は炭素数1以上6以下のアルキル基である。)を3つ以上有する化合物であるが、好ましくは、分子内に-C(=O)OX基を3つ以上6つ以下有する化合物であり、より好ましくは、分子内に-C(=O)OX基を3つ又は4つ有する化合物である。 The crosslinking agent (B) is a compound having three or more -C(=O)OX groups (X is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms) in the molecule, but preferably , a compound having 3 or more and 6 or less -C(=O)OX groups in the molecule, more preferably a compound having 3 or 4 -C(=O)OX groups in the molecule.

 架橋剤(B)において、-C(=O)OX基中のXとしては、水素原子又は炭素数1以上6以下のアルキル基が挙げられ、中でも、水素原子、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基が好ましい。なお、-C(=O)OX基中のXは互いに同一であってもよく、異なっていてもよい。 In the crosslinking agent (B), examples of X in the -C(=O)OX group include a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and among them, a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, an ethyl group, and a propyl group. is preferred. Note that X in the -C(=O)OX group may be the same or different.

 架橋剤(B)は、分子内にXが水素原子である-C(=O)OH基を1つ以上6つ以下有する化合物であるが、好ましくは、分子内に-C(=O)OH基を1つ以上4つ以下有する化合物であり、より好ましくは、分子内に-C(=O)OH基を2つ以上4つ以下有する化合物であり、さらに好ましくは、分子内に-C(=O)OH基を2つ又は3つ有する化合物である。 The crosslinking agent (B) is a compound having one to six -C(=O)OH groups in which X is a hydrogen atom in the molecule, but preferably -C(=O)OH in the molecule. A compound having one to four groups, more preferably a compound having two to four -C(=O)OH groups in the molecule, and even more preferably a compound having -C(=O)OH groups in the molecule. =O) It is a compound having two or three OH groups.

 架橋剤(B)は、重量平均分子量が200以上2000以下の化合物である。架橋剤(B)の重量平均分子量は、200以上1000以下であることが好ましく、200以上600以下であることがより好ましく、200以上400以下であることがさらに好ましい。 The crosslinking agent (B) is a compound with a weight average molecular weight of 200 or more and 2000 or less. The weight average molecular weight of the crosslinking agent (B) is preferably 200 or more and 1000 or less, more preferably 200 or more and 600 or less, and even more preferably 200 or more and 400 or less.

 架橋剤(B)は、分子内に環構造を有することが好ましい。環構造としては、脂環構造、芳香環構造などが挙げられる。また、架橋剤(B)は、分子内に複数の環構造を有していてもよく、複数の環構造は、同じであっても異なっていてもよい。 It is preferable that the crosslinking agent (B) has a ring structure within the molecule. Examples of the ring structure include an alicyclic structure and an aromatic ring structure. Further, the crosslinking agent (B) may have a plurality of ring structures within the molecule, and the plurality of ring structures may be the same or different.

 脂環構造としては、例えば、炭素数3以上8以下の脂環構造、好ましくは炭素数4以上6以下の脂環構造が挙げられ、環構造内は飽和であっても不飽和であってもよい。より具体的には、脂環構造としては、シクロプロパン環、シクロブタン環、シクロペンタン環、シクロヘキサン環、シクロヘプタン環、シクロオクタン環などの飽和脂環構造;シクロプロペン環、シクロブテン環、シクロペンテン環、シクロヘキセン環、シクロヘプテン環、シクロオクテン環などの不飽和脂環構造が挙げられる。 Examples of the alicyclic structure include an alicyclic structure having 3 to 8 carbon atoms, preferably an alicyclic structure having 4 to 6 carbon atoms, and the ring structure may be saturated or unsaturated. good. More specifically, the alicyclic structure includes saturated alicyclic structures such as a cyclopropane ring, a cyclobutane ring, a cyclopentane ring, a cyclohexane ring, a cycloheptane ring, and a cyclooctane ring; a cyclopropene ring, a cyclobutene ring, a cyclopentene ring, Examples include unsaturated alicyclic structures such as a cyclohexene ring, a cycloheptene ring, and a cyclooctene ring.

 芳香環構造としては、芳香族性を示す環構造であれば特に限定されず、例えば、ベンゼン環、ナフタレン環、アントラセン環、ペリレン環などのベンゼン系芳香環、ピリジン環、チオフェン環などの芳香族複素環、インデン環、アズレン環などの非ベンゼン系芳香環などが挙げられる。 The aromatic ring structure is not particularly limited as long as it exhibits aromaticity, and examples include benzene-based aromatic rings such as benzene ring, naphthalene ring, anthracene ring, and perylene ring, aromatic rings such as pyridine ring, and thiophene ring. Examples include non-benzene aromatic rings such as heterocycles, indene rings, and azulene rings.

 架橋剤(B)が分子内に有する環構造としては、例えば、シクロブタン環、シクロペンタン環、シクロヘキサン環、ベンゼン環及びナフタレン環からなる群より選択される少なくとも1つが好ましく、第1の樹脂層及び第2の樹脂層の耐熱性をより高める点から、ベンゼン環及びナフタレン環の少なくとも一方がより好ましい。 The ring structure that the crosslinking agent (B) has in its molecule is preferably at least one selected from the group consisting of a cyclobutane ring, a cyclopentane ring, a cyclohexane ring, a benzene ring, and a naphthalene ring. At least one of a benzene ring and a naphthalene ring is more preferred in terms of further improving the heat resistance of the second resin layer.

 前述したように、架橋剤(B)は、分子内に複数の環構造を有していてもよく、環構造がベンゼンの場合、ビフェニル構造、ベンゾフェノン構造、ジフェニルエーテル構造などを有してもよい。 As mentioned above, the crosslinking agent (B) may have a plurality of ring structures in its molecule, and when the ring structure is benzene, it may have a biphenyl structure, a benzophenone structure, a diphenyl ether structure, etc.

 架橋剤(B)は、分子内にフッ素原子を有することが好ましく、分子内に1つ以上6つ以下のフッ素原子を有することがより好ましく、分子内に3つ以上6つ以下のフッ素原子を有することがさらに好ましい。例えば、架橋剤(B)は、分子内にフルオロアルキル基を有していてもよく、具体的には、トリフルオロアルキル基又はヘキサフルオロイソプロピル基を有していてもよい。 The crosslinking agent (B) preferably has a fluorine atom in the molecule, more preferably has 1 to 6 fluorine atoms in the molecule, and has 3 to 6 fluorine atoms in the molecule. It is further preferable to have. For example, the crosslinking agent (B) may have a fluoroalkyl group in the molecule, specifically, a trifluoroalkyl group or a hexafluoroisopropyl group.

 さらに、架橋剤(B)としては、脂環カルボン酸、ベンゼンカルボン酸、ナフタレンカルボン酸、ジフタル酸、フッ化芳香環カルボン酸などのカルボン酸化合物;脂環カルボン酸エステル、ベンゼンカルボン酸エステル、ナフタレンカルボン酸エステル、ジフタル酸エステル、フッ化芳香環カルボン酸エステルなどのカルボン酸エステル化合物が挙げられる。なお、カルボン酸エステル化合物は、分子内にカルボキシ基(-C(=O)OH基)を有し、かつ、3つ以上の-C(=O)OX基において、少なくとも1つのXが炭素数1以上6以下のアルキル基(すなわち、エステル結合を有する)である化合物である。本開示では、架橋剤(B)がカルボン酸エステル化合物であることにより、化合物(A)と架橋剤(B)との会合による凝集が抑制され、凝集体及びピットが少なくなり、膜厚の調整が容易となる。 Further, as the crosslinking agent (B), carboxylic acid compounds such as alicyclic carboxylic acid, benzene carboxylic acid, naphthalene carboxylic acid, diphthalic acid, and fluorinated aromatic ring carboxylic acid; alicyclic carboxylic acid ester, benzene carboxylic acid ester, naphthalene carboxylic acid Examples include carboxylic acid ester compounds such as carboxylic acid ester, diphthalic acid ester, and fluorinated aromatic ring carboxylic acid ester. The carboxylic acid ester compound has a carboxy group (-C(=O)OH group) in the molecule, and in three or more -C(=O)OX groups, at least one X has a carbon number. It is a compound having 1 or more and 6 or less alkyl groups (that is, having an ester bond). In the present disclosure, since the crosslinking agent (B) is a carboxylic acid ester compound, aggregation due to association between the compound (A) and the crosslinking agent (B) is suppressed, aggregates and pits are reduced, and film thickness can be adjusted. becomes easier.

 前記カルボン酸化合物としては、-C(=O)OH基を4つ以下含む4価以下のカルボン酸化合物であることが好ましく、-C(=O)OH基を3つ又は4つ含む3価又は4価のカルボン酸化合物であることがより好ましい。 The carboxylic acid compound is preferably a tetravalent or lower carboxylic acid compound containing four or less -C(=O)OH groups, and a trivalent carboxylic acid compound containing three or four -C(=O)OH groups. Or, it is more preferable that it is a tetravalent carboxylic acid compound.

 前記カルボン酸エステル化合物としては、分子内にカルボキシ基(-C(=O)OH基)を3つ以下含み、かつエステル結合を3つ以下含む化合物であることが好ましく、分子内にカルボキシ基を2つ以下含み、かつエステル結合を2つ以下含む化合物であることがより好ましい。 The carboxylic acid ester compound is preferably a compound containing three or less carboxy groups (-C(=O)OH groups) and three or less ester bonds in the molecule; It is more preferable that the compound contains two or less ester bonds and contains two or less ester bonds.

 また、前記カルボン酸エステル化合物では、3つ以上の-C(=O)OX基において、Xが炭素数1以上6以下のアルキル基である場合、Xは、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基などが好ましいが、化合物(A)と架橋剤(B)との会合による凝集をより抑制する点から、エチル基又はプロピル基であることが好ましい。 Further, in the carboxylic acid ester compound, when X is an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms in three or more -C(=O)OX groups, X is a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, A butyl group is preferable, but an ethyl group or a propyl group is preferable from the viewpoint of further suppressing aggregation due to association between the compound (A) and the crosslinking agent (B).

 前記カルボン酸化合物の具体例としては、これらに限定されず、1,2,3,4-シクロブタンテトラカルボン酸、1,2,3,4-シクロペンタンテトラカルボン酸、1,3,5-シクロヘキサントリカルボン酸、1,2,4-シクロヘキサントリカルボン酸、1,2,4,5-シクロヘキサンテトラカルボン酸、1,2,3,4,5,6-シクロヘキサンヘキサカルボン酸等の脂環カルボン酸;1,2,4-ベンゼントリカルボン酸、1,3,5-ベンゼントリカルボン酸、ピロメリット酸、3,4’-ビフタル酸、P-フェニレンビス(トリメリテート酸)、ベンゼンペンタカルボン酸、メリト酸等のベンゼンカルボン酸;1,4,5,8-ナフタレンテトラカルボン酸、2,3,6,7-ナフタレンテトラカルボン酸等のナフタレンカルボン酸;3,3’,5,5’-テトラカルボキシジフェニルメタン、ビフェニル-3,3’,5,5’-テトラカルボン酸、ビフェニル-3,4’,5-トリカルボン酸、ビフェニル-3,3’,4,4’-テトラカルボン酸、ベンゾフェノン-3,3’,4,4’-テトラカルボン酸、4,4’-オキシジフタル酸、3,4’-オキシジフタル酸、1,3-ビス(フタル酸)テトラメチルジシロキサン、4,4’-(エチン-1,2-ジイル)ジフタル酸(4,4'-(Ethyne-1,2-diyl)diphthalic acid)、4,4’-(1,4-フェニレンビス(オキシ))ジフタル酸(4,4'-(1,4-phenylenebis(oxy))diphthalic acid)、4,4’-([1,1’-ビフェニル]-4,4’-ジイルビス(オキシ))ジフタル酸(4,4'-([1,1'-biphenyl]-4,4'-diylbis(oxy))diphthalicacid)、4,4’-((オキシビス(4,1-フェニレン))ビス(オキシ))ジフタル酸(4,4'-((oxybis(4,1-phenylene))bis(oxy))diphthalic acid)等のジフタル酸;ペリレン-3,4,9,10-テトラカルボン酸等のペリレンカルボン酸;アントラセン-2,3,6,7-テトラカルボン酸等のアントラセンカルボン酸;4,4’-(ヘキサフルオロイソプロピリデン)ジフタル酸、9,9-ビス(トリフルオロメチル)-9H-キサンテン-2,3,6,7-テトラカルボン酸、1,4-ジトリフルオロメチルピロメリット酸等のフッ化芳香環カルボン酸が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the carboxylic acid compound include, but are not limited to, 1,2,3,4-cyclobutanetetracarboxylic acid, 1,2,3,4-cyclopentanetetracarboxylic acid, and 1,3,5-cyclohexane. Alicyclic carboxylic acids such as tricarboxylic acid, 1,2,4-cyclohexanetricarboxylic acid, 1,2,4,5-cyclohexanetetracarboxylic acid, 1,2,3,4,5,6-cyclohexanehexacarboxylic acid; 1 , 2,4-benzenetricarboxylic acid, 1,3,5-benzenetricarboxylic acid, pyromellitic acid, 3,4'-biphthalic acid, P-phenylenebis(trimellitate acid), benzenepentacarboxylic acid, mellitic acid, etc. Carboxylic acids; Naphthalenecarboxylic acids such as 1,4,5,8-naphthalenetetracarboxylic acid and 2,3,6,7-naphthalenetetracarboxylic acid; 3,3',5,5'-tetracarboxydiphenylmethane, biphenyl- 3,3',5,5'-tetracarboxylic acid, biphenyl-3,4',5-tricarboxylic acid, biphenyl-3,3',4,4'-tetracarboxylic acid, benzophenone-3,3',4 , 4'-tetracarboxylic acid, 4,4'-oxydiphthalic acid, 3,4'-oxydiphthalic acid, 1,3-bis(phthalic acid)tetramethyldisiloxane, 4,4'-(ethyne-1,2- 4,4'-(Ethyne-1,2-diyl)diphthalic acid, 4,4'-(1,4-phenylenebis(oxy))diphthalic acid 4-phenylenebis(oxy))diphthalic acid), 4,4'-([1,1'-biphenyl]-4,4'-diylbis(oxy))diphthalic acid (4,4'-([1,1' -biphenyl]-4,4'-diylbis(oxy))diphthalicacid), 4,4'-((oxybis(4,1-phenylene))bis(oxy))diphthalic acid(4,4'-((oxybis( Diphthalic acid such as 4,1-phenylene))bis(oxy))diphthalic acid); Perylene carboxylic acid such as perylene-3,4,9,10-tetracarboxylic acid; Anthracene-2,3,6,7-tetra Anthracenecarboxylic acid such as carboxylic acid; 4,4'-(hexafluoroisopropylidene)diphthalic acid, 9,9-bis(trifluoromethyl)-9H-xanthene-2,3,6,7-tetracarboxylic acid, 1 , 4-ditrifluoromethylpyromellitic acid and other fluorinated aromatic ring carboxylic acids.

 前記カルボン酸エステル化合物の具体例としては、前述のカルボン酸化合物の具体例における少なくとも1つのカルボキシ基がエステル基に置換された化合物が挙げられる。カルボン酸エステル化合物としては、例えば、下記一般式(B-1)~(B-5)で表されるハーフエステル化された化合物が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the carboxylic acid ester compounds include compounds in which at least one carboxy group in the specific examples of the carboxylic acid compounds described above is substituted with an ester group. Examples of the carboxylic acid ester compound include half-esterified compounds represented by the following general formulas (B-1) to (B-5).

 一般式(B-1)~(B-5)におけるRは、それぞれ独立に炭素数1以上6以下のアルキル基であり、中でもメチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基が好ましく、エチル基、プロピル基がより好ましい。
 一般式(B-2)におけるYは、単結合、O、C=O、又はC(CFである。
R in general formulas (B-1) to (B-5) each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 or more and 6 or less carbon atoms, and among them, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group are preferable, and an ethyl group, Propyl group is more preferred.
Y in general formula (B-2) is a single bond, O, C=O, or C(CF 3 ) 2 .

 ハーフエステル化された化合物は、例えば、前述のカルボン酸化合物の無水物であるカルボン酸無水物を、アルコール溶媒に混合し、カルボン酸無水物を開環させて生成することが可能である。 A half-esterified compound can be produced, for example, by mixing a carboxylic acid anhydride, which is an anhydride of the aforementioned carboxylic acid compound, with an alcohol solvent and ring-opening the carboxylic acid anhydride.

 本開示において、第1の樹脂層中及び第2の樹脂層中における架橋剤(B)由来の成分の含有量は、特に制限されず、例えば、化合物(A)由来物質中の全窒素原子の数に対する架橋剤(B)由来の物質中のカルボニル基(-(C=O)-Y)の数の比率((-(C=O)-Y)/N)は、それぞれ独立に、0.1以上3.0以下であることが好ましく、0.3以上2.5以下であることがより好ましく、0.4以上2.2以下であることがさらに好ましい。ここで、-(C=O)-Yにおいて、Yはイミド架橋若しくはアミド架橋された窒素原子、OH、又はエステル基を表す。(-(C=O)-Y)/Nが0.1以上3.0以下であることにより、第1の樹脂層及び第2の樹脂層は、アミド、アミドイミド、イミドなどの架橋構造を好適に有し、耐熱性により優れる。 In the present disclosure, the content of the component derived from the crosslinking agent (B) in the first resin layer and the second resin layer is not particularly limited, and for example, the content of the component derived from the compound (A) is The ratio of the number of carbonyl groups (-(C=O)-Y) in the substance derived from the crosslinking agent (B) to the number ((-(C=O)-Y)/N) is independently 0. It is preferably 1 or more and 3.0 or less, more preferably 0.3 or more and 2.5 or less, and even more preferably 0.4 or more and 2.2 or less. Here, in -(C=O)-Y, Y represents an imide-bridged or amide-bridged nitrogen atom, OH, or an ester group. (-(C=O)-Y)/N is 0.1 or more and 3.0 or less, so that the first resin layer and the second resin layer preferably have a crosslinked structure of amide, amide-imide, imide, etc. , and has superior heat resistance.

(極性溶媒(D))
 工程Aは、第1の基板及び第2の基板の少なくとも一方の表面上に、樹脂材料を含む樹脂組成物を付与してもよい。このとき、樹脂材料を含む樹脂組成物は、前述の化合物(A)、架橋剤(B)等の樹脂材料とともに、極性溶媒(D)を含むことが好ましい。ここで、極性溶媒(D)とは室温における比誘電率が5以上である溶媒を指す。極性溶媒(D)としては、具体的には、水、重水などのプロトン性無機化合物;メタノール、エタノール、1-プロパノール、2-プロパノール、1-ブタノール、2-ブタノール、イソブチルアルコール、イソペンチルアルコール、シクロヘキサノール、エチレングリコール、プロピレングリコール、2-メトキシエタノール、2-エトキシエタノール、ベンジルアルコール、ジエチレングリコール、トリエチレングリコール、グリセリンなどのアルコール類;テトラヒドロフラン、ジメトキシエタンなどのエーテル類;フルフラール、アセトン、エチルメチルケトン、シクロヘキサンなどのアルデヒド・ケトン類;無水酢酸、酢酸エチル、酢酸ブチル、炭酸エチレン、炭酸プロピレン、ホルムアルデヒド、N-メチルホルムアミド、N,N-ジメチルホルムアミド、N-メチルアセトアミド、N,N-ジメチルアセトアミド、N-メチル-2-ピロリドン、ヘキサメチルリン酸アミドなどの酸誘導体;アセトニトリル、プロピオニトリルなどのニトリル類;ニトロメタン、ニトロベンゼンなどのニトロ化合物;ジメチルスルホキシドなどの硫黄化合物が挙げられる。極性溶媒(D)としては、プロトン性溶媒を含むことが好ましく、水を含むことがより好ましく、超純水を含むことがさらに好ましい。
 樹脂組成物中における極性溶媒(D)の含有量は、特に限定されず、例えば、樹脂組成物全体に対して1.0質量%以上99.99896質量%以下であり、40質量%以上99.99896質量%以下であることが好ましい。
 極性溶媒(D)の沸点としては、第1の樹脂層及び第2の樹脂層を形成するときの加熱により極性溶媒(D)を揮発させ、第1の樹脂層中及び第2の樹脂層中の残溶媒の量を少なくする点から、150℃以下が好ましく、120℃以下がより好ましい。
(Polar solvent (D))
In step A, a resin composition containing a resin material may be applied onto the surface of at least one of the first substrate and the second substrate. At this time, the resin composition containing the resin material preferably contains a polar solvent (D) together with the resin materials such as the above-mentioned compound (A) and crosslinking agent (B). Here, the polar solvent (D) refers to a solvent having a dielectric constant of 5 or more at room temperature. Specific examples of the polar solvent (D) include protic inorganic compounds such as water and heavy water; methanol, ethanol, 1-propanol, 2-propanol, 1-butanol, 2-butanol, isobutyl alcohol, isopentyl alcohol, Alcohols such as cyclohexanol, ethylene glycol, propylene glycol, 2-methoxyethanol, 2-ethoxyethanol, benzyl alcohol, diethylene glycol, triethylene glycol, glycerin; Ethers such as tetrahydrofuran and dimethoxyethane; furfural, acetone, ethyl methyl ketone , aldehydes and ketones such as cyclohexane; acetic anhydride, ethyl acetate, butyl acetate, ethylene carbonate, propylene carbonate, formaldehyde, N-methylformamide, N,N-dimethylformamide, N-methylacetamide, N,N-dimethylacetamide, Examples include acid derivatives such as N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone and hexamethylphosphoric acid amide; nitriles such as acetonitrile and propionitrile; nitro compounds such as nitromethane and nitrobenzene; and sulfur compounds such as dimethyl sulfoxide. The polar solvent (D) preferably includes a protic solvent, more preferably includes water, and even more preferably includes ultrapure water.
The content of the polar solvent (D) in the resin composition is not particularly limited, and is, for example, 1.0% by mass or more and 99.99896% by mass or less, and 40% by mass or more and 99.9% by mass or less based on the entire resin composition. It is preferably 99896% by mass or less.
The boiling point of the polar solvent (D) is such that the polar solvent (D) is volatilized by heating when forming the first resin layer and the second resin layer, and In terms of reducing the amount of residual solvent, the temperature is preferably 150°C or lower, more preferably 120°C or lower.

(添加剤(C))
 樹脂材料を含む樹脂組成物は、前述の化合物(A)、架橋剤(B)等の樹脂材料、極性溶媒(D)等のほかに添加剤(C)を含んでいてもよい。添加剤(C)としては、カルボキシ基を有する重量平均分子量46以上195以下の酸(C-1)、窒素原子を有する重量平均分子量17以上120以下の環構造を有しない塩基(C-2)が挙げられる。また、第1の樹脂層及び第2の樹脂層を形成するときの加熱により添加剤(C)は揮発するが、本開示の基板積層体中の第1の樹脂層及び第2の樹脂層は、添加剤(C)を含んでいてもよい。
(Additive (C))
The resin composition containing the resin material may contain an additive (C) in addition to the above-mentioned compound (A), the resin material such as the crosslinking agent (B), the polar solvent (D), and the like. As the additive (C), an acid having a carboxyl group and having a weight average molecular weight of 46 to 195 (C-1), a base having a nitrogen atom and having a weight average molecular weight of 17 to 120 and not having a ring structure (C-2) can be mentioned. Further, although the additive (C) is vaporized by heating when forming the first resin layer and the second resin layer, the first resin layer and the second resin layer in the substrate laminate of the present disclosure are , an additive (C) may be included.

 酸(C-1)は、カルボキシ基を有する重量平均分子量46以上195以下の酸である。添加剤(C)として酸(C-1)を含むことにより、化合物(A)におけるアミノ基と酸(C-1)におけるカルボキシ基とがイオン結合を形成することで、化合物(A)と架橋剤(B)との会合による凝集が抑制されると推測される。より詳細には、化合物(A)におけるアミノ基に由来するアンモニウムイオンと酸(C-1)におけるカルボキシ基に由来するカルボキシラートイオンとの相互作用(例えば、静電相互作用)が、化合物(A)におけるアミノ基に由来するアンモニウムイオンと架橋剤(B)におけるカルボキシ基に由来するカルボキシラートイオンとの相互作用よりも強いため、凝集が抑制されると推測される。なお、本発明は上記推測によって何ら限定されない。 The acid (C-1) is an acid having a weight average molecular weight of 46 or more and 195 or less and having a carboxy group. By including the acid (C-1) as the additive (C), the amino group in the compound (A) and the carboxy group in the acid (C-1) form an ionic bond, resulting in crosslinking with the compound (A). It is presumed that aggregation due to association with agent (B) is suppressed. More specifically, the interaction between the ammonium ion derived from the amino group in compound (A) and the carboxylate ion derived from the carboxy group in acid (C-1) (for example, electrostatic interaction) ) is stronger than the interaction between the ammonium ion derived from the amino group in the crosslinking agent (B) and the carboxylate ion derived from the carboxy group in the crosslinking agent (B), so it is presumed that aggregation is suppressed. Note that the present invention is not limited in any way by the above speculation.

 酸(C-1)としては、カルボキシ基を有し、かつ重量平均分子量46以上195以下の化合物であれば特に限定されず、モノカルボン酸化合物、ジカルボン酸化合物、オキシジカルボン酸化合物などが挙げられる。より具体的には、酸(C-1)としては、ギ酸、酢酸、マロン酸、シュウ酸、クエン酸、安息香酸、乳酸、グリコール酸、グリセリン酸、酪酸、メトキシ酢酸、エトキシ酢酸、フタル酸、テレフタル酸、ピコリン酸、サリチル酸、3,4,5-トリヒドロキシ安息香酸などが挙げられる。 The acid (C-1) is not particularly limited as long as it has a carboxy group and has a weight average molecular weight of 46 or more and 195 or less, and examples thereof include monocarboxylic acid compounds, dicarboxylic acid compounds, oxydicarboxylic acid compounds, etc. . More specifically, the acid (C-1) includes formic acid, acetic acid, malonic acid, oxalic acid, citric acid, benzoic acid, lactic acid, glycolic acid, glyceric acid, butyric acid, methoxyacetic acid, ethoxyacetic acid, phthalic acid, Examples include terephthalic acid, picolinic acid, salicylic acid, and 3,4,5-trihydroxybenzoic acid.

 本開示において、樹脂材料を含む樹脂組成物における酸(C-1)の含有量は、特に制限されず、例えば、化合物(A)中の全窒素原子の数に対する酸(C-1)中のカルボキシ基の数の比率(COOH/N)が、0.01以上10以下であることが好ましく、0.02以上6以下であることがより好ましく、0.5以上3以下がさらに好ましい。 In the present disclosure, the content of the acid (C-1) in the resin composition containing the resin material is not particularly limited, and for example, the content of the acid (C-1) relative to the total number of nitrogen atoms in the compound (A) is The ratio of the number of carboxy groups (COOH/N) is preferably 0.01 or more and 10 or less, more preferably 0.02 or more and 6 or less, and even more preferably 0.5 or more and 3 or less.

 塩基(C-2)は、窒素原子を有する重量平均分子量17以上120以下の塩基である。樹脂材料を含む樹脂組成物は、添加剤(C)として塩基(C-2)を含むことにより、架橋剤(B)におけるカルボキシ基と塩基(C-2)におけるアミノ基とがイオン結合を形成することで、化合物(A)と架橋剤(B)との会合による凝集が抑制されると推測される。より詳細には、架橋剤(B)におけるカルボキシ基に由来するカルボキシラートイオンと塩基(C-2)におけるアミノ基に由来するアンモニウムイオンとの相互作用が、化合物(A)におけるアミノ基に由来するアンモニウムイオンと架橋剤(B)におけるカルボキシ基に由来するカルボキシラートイオンとの相互作用よりも強いため、凝集が抑制されると推測される。なお、本発明は上記推測によって何ら限定されない。 The base (C-2) is a base having a nitrogen atom and having a weight average molecular weight of 17 or more and 120 or less. The resin composition containing the resin material includes a base (C-2) as an additive (C), so that the carboxy group in the crosslinking agent (B) and the amino group in the base (C-2) form an ionic bond. It is presumed that by doing so, aggregation due to association between compound (A) and crosslinking agent (B) is suppressed. More specifically, the interaction between the carboxylate ion derived from the carboxy group in the crosslinking agent (B) and the ammonium ion derived from the amino group in the base (C-2) is derived from the amino group in the compound (A). It is assumed that aggregation is suppressed because the interaction is stronger than the interaction between the ammonium ion and the carboxylate ion derived from the carboxy group in the crosslinking agent (B). Note that the present invention is not limited in any way by the above speculation.

 塩基(C-2)としては、窒素原子を有し、かつ重量平均分子量17以上120以下の環構造を有しない化合物であれば特に限定されず、モノアミン化合物、ジアミン化合物などが挙げられる。より具体的には、塩基(C-2)としては、アンモニア、エチルアミン、エタノールアミン、ジエチルアミン、トリエチルアミン、エチレンジアミン、N-アセチルエチレンジアミン、N-(2-アミノエチル)エタノールアミン、N-(2-アミノエチル)グリシンなどが挙げられる。 The base (C-2) is not particularly limited as long as it has a nitrogen atom and has a weight average molecular weight of 17 or more and 120 or less and does not have a ring structure, and includes monoamine compounds, diamine compounds, and the like. More specifically, the base (C-2) includes ammonia, ethylamine, ethanolamine, diethylamine, triethylamine, ethylenediamine, N-acetylethylenediamine, N-(2-aminoethyl)ethanolamine, N-(2-aminoethyl)ethanolamine, and N-(2-aminoethyl)ethanolamine. Examples include ethyl)glycine.

 本開示において、樹脂材料を含む樹脂組成物における塩基(C-2)の含有量は、特に制限されず、例えば、架橋剤(B)中のカルボキシ基の数に対する塩基(C-2)中の窒素原子の数の比率(N/COOH)が、0.5以上5以下であることが好ましく、0.9以上3以下であることがより好ましい。 In the present disclosure, the content of the base (C-2) in the resin composition containing the resin material is not particularly limited, and for example, the content of the base (C-2) relative to the number of carboxy groups in the crosslinking agent (B) is The ratio of the number of nitrogen atoms (N/COOH) is preferably 0.5 or more and 5 or less, more preferably 0.9 or more and 3 or less.

 本開示の基板積層体の第1の樹脂層及び第2の樹脂層に絶縁性が求められる場合において、絶縁性又は機械強度改善のため、テトラエトキシシラン、テトラメトキシシラン、ビストリエトキシシリルエタン、ビストリエトキシシリルメタン、ビス(メチルジエトキシシリル)エタン、1,1,3,3,5,5-ヘキサエトキシ-1,3,5-トリシラシクロヘキサン、1,3,5,7-テトラメチル―1,3,5,7-テトラヒドロキシルシクロシロキサン、1,1,4,4-テトラメチル-1,4-ジエトキシジシルエチレン、1,3,5-トリメチル-1,3,5-トリメチル-1,3,5-トリエトキシ-1,3,5-トリシラシクロヘキサンを混合させてもよい。さらに、絶縁性を有する第1の樹脂層及び第2の樹脂層の疎水性改善のためにメチルトリエトキシシラン、ジメチルジエトキシシラン、トリメチルエトキシシラン等を混合させてもよい。これらの化合物はエッチング選択性の制御の為に混合させてもよい。 When insulation properties are required for the first resin layer and the second resin layer of the substrate laminate of the present disclosure, tetraethoxysilane, tetramethoxysilane, bistriethoxysilylethane, bistriethoxysilylethane, bistriethoxysilane, bistriethoxysilane, bistriethoxysilane, bistriethoxysilane, etc. Ethoxysilylmethane, bis(methyldiethoxysilyl)ethane, 1,1,3,3,5,5-hexaethoxy-1,3,5-trisilacyclohexane, 1,3,5,7-tetramethyl-1 , 3,5,7-tetrahydroxylcyclosiloxane, 1,1,4,4-tetramethyl-1,4-diethoxydisylethylene, 1,3,5-trimethyl-1,3,5-trimethyl-1 , 3,5-triethoxy-1,3,5-trisilacyclohexane may be mixed. Furthermore, methyltriethoxysilane, dimethyldiethoxysilane, trimethylethoxysilane, etc. may be mixed in order to improve the hydrophobicity of the first resin layer and the second resin layer having insulating properties. These compounds may be mixed to control etching selectivity.

 樹脂材料を含む樹脂組成物は、極性溶媒(D)以外の溶媒を含んでいてもよく、例えば、ノルマルヘキサンなどが挙げられる。 The resin composition containing the resin material may contain a solvent other than the polar solvent (D), such as normal hexane.

 また、樹脂材料を含む樹脂組成物は、例えば電気特性改善のために、フタル酸、安息香酸など、又はこれらの誘導体を含有してもよい。
 また、樹脂材料を含む樹脂組成物は、例えば銅の腐食を抑制するため、ベンゾトリアゾール又はその誘導体を含有していてもよい。
Further, the resin composition containing the resin material may contain phthalic acid, benzoic acid, etc., or derivatives thereof, for example, to improve electrical characteristics.
Further, the resin composition containing the resin material may contain benzotriazole or a derivative thereof, for example, in order to suppress corrosion of copper.

 樹脂材料を含む樹脂組成物のpHとしては、特に限定されず、2.0以上12.0以下であることが好ましい。 The pH of the resin composition containing the resin material is not particularly limited, and is preferably 2.0 or more and 12.0 or less.

 また、添加剤(C)として酸(C-1)を用いる場合、酸(C-1)と化合物(A)との混合物と、架橋剤(B)と、を混合することが好ましい。すなわち、化合物(A)と架橋剤(B)とを混合する前に、化合物(A)と酸(C-1)とを予め混合しておくことが好ましい。これにより、化合物(A)と架橋剤(B)とを混合した際に、樹脂材料を含む樹脂組成物の白濁及びゲル化(ゲル化すると樹脂組成物の透明化に時間がかかる場合があり、好ましくない)を好適に抑制することができる。 Furthermore, when acid (C-1) is used as additive (C), it is preferable to mix a mixture of acid (C-1) and compound (A) with crosslinking agent (B). That is, it is preferable to mix compound (A) and acid (C-1) in advance before mixing compound (A) and crosslinking agent (B). As a result, when compound (A) and crosslinking agent (B) are mixed, cloudiness and gelation of the resin composition containing the resin material (if gelation occurs, it may take time for the resin composition to become transparent; undesirable) can be suitably suppressed.

 また、添加剤(C)として塩基(C-2)を用いる場合、塩基(C-2)と架橋剤(B)との混合物と、化合物(A)と、を混合することが好ましい。すなわち、化合物(A)と架橋剤(B)とを混合する前に、架橋剤(B)と塩基(C-2)とを予め混合しておくことが好ましい。これにより、化合物(A)と架橋剤(B)とを混合した際に、樹脂材料を含む樹脂組成物の白濁及びゲル化(ゲル化すると樹脂組成物の透明化に時間がかかる場合があり、好ましくない)を好適に抑制することができる。 Furthermore, when using the base (C-2) as the additive (C), it is preferable to mix the mixture of the base (C-2) and the crosslinking agent (B) with the compound (A). That is, it is preferable to mix the crosslinking agent (B) and the base (C-2) in advance before mixing the compound (A) and the crosslinking agent (B). As a result, when compound (A) and crosslinking agent (B) are mixed, cloudiness and gelation of the resin composition containing the resin material (if gelation occurs, it may take time for the resin composition to become transparent; undesirable) can be suitably suppressed.

 第1の基板及び第2の基板の少なくとも一方の表面上に、樹脂材料を付与する方法としては、例えば、蒸着重合、CVD(化学蒸着)法、ALD(原子層堆積)法等の気相成膜法、ディッピング法、スプレー法、スピンコート法、バーコート法等の塗布法などが挙げられる。塗布法により、樹脂材料を付与する場合、前述の樹脂材料を含む樹脂組成物を付与することが好ましい。例えば、ミクロンサイズの膜厚を有する膜を形成する場合、バーコート法を用いることが好ましく、ナノサイズ(数nm~数百nm)の膜厚を有する膜を形成する場合、スピンコート法を用いることが好ましい。なお、樹脂材料の膜厚は、第1の樹脂層及び第2の樹脂層の意図する厚さに応じて適宜調整すればよい。 Examples of methods for applying the resin material on the surface of at least one of the first substrate and the second substrate include vapor deposition polymerization, CVD (chemical vapor deposition), and ALD (atomic layer deposition). Application methods include a film method, a dipping method, a spray method, a spin coating method, and a bar coating method. When applying a resin material by a coating method, it is preferable to apply a resin composition containing the above-mentioned resin material. For example, when forming a film with a micron-sized film thickness, it is preferable to use a bar coating method, and when forming a film with a nano-sized film thickness (several nanometers to several hundred nanometers), a spin coating method is used. It is preferable. Note that the film thickness of the resin material may be adjusted as appropriate depending on the intended thickness of the first resin layer and the second resin layer.

 例えば、スピンコート法による樹脂材料を付与する方法としては特に限定されず、例えば、第1の基板をスピンコーターで回転させながら、第1の基板の表面に樹脂材料を含む樹脂組成物を滴下し、次いで第1の基板の回転数を上げて乾燥させる方法を用いることができる。
 スピンコート法による樹脂材料を付与する方法において、基板の回転数、樹脂材料を含む樹脂組成物の滴下量及び滴下時間、乾燥時の基板の回転数などの諸条件については特に制限はなく、形成する樹脂材料の厚さなどを考慮しながら適宜調整すればよい。
For example, the method of applying the resin material by spin coating is not particularly limited, and for example, a resin composition containing the resin material is dripped onto the surface of the first substrate while rotating the first substrate with a spin coater. Then, a method can be used in which the first substrate is dried by increasing the number of rotations.
In the method of applying a resin material by spin coating, there are no particular restrictions on various conditions such as the number of rotations of the substrate, the amount and time of dropping the resin composition containing the resin material, and the number of rotations of the substrate during drying. It may be adjusted as appropriate while considering the thickness of the resin material used.

 樹脂材料が付与された基板について、付与された余分な樹脂材料を除去するために、樹脂材料が付与された基板を洗浄してもよい。洗浄方法は、極性溶媒等のリンス液によるウェット洗浄、プラズマクリーニングなどが挙げられる。 Regarding the substrate to which the resin material has been applied, the substrate to which the resin material has been applied may be cleaned in order to remove the excess resin material applied. Examples of the cleaning method include wet cleaning using a rinsing liquid such as a polar solvent, plasma cleaning, and the like.

 本開示の基板積層体の製造方法では、工程Aは、第1の基板の一方の表面及び第2の基板の一方の表面に付与された樹脂材料を硬化して第1の樹脂層及び第2の樹脂層を形成する工程を含んでいてもよい。例えば、樹脂材料を加熱等により硬化させて第1の樹脂層及び第2の樹脂層を形成する。このとき、樹脂材料が熱硬化性化合物を含む場合、硬化温度以上の温度で樹脂材料を加熱することにより硬化される。 In the method for manufacturing a substrate laminate according to the present disclosure, step A includes curing the resin material applied to one surface of the first substrate and one surface of the second substrate to form the first resin layer and the second substrate. The method may include a step of forming a resin layer. For example, the first resin layer and the second resin layer are formed by curing the resin material by heating or the like. At this time, when the resin material contains a thermosetting compound, it is cured by heating the resin material at a temperature equal to or higher than the curing temperature.

 第1の基板の一方の表面及び第2の基板の一方の表面に付与された樹脂材料を100℃~450℃で加熱して硬化させることが好ましい。
 なお、前述の温度は、前記表面に付与された樹脂材料の表面の温度を指す。
 樹脂材料を加熱することにより、樹脂材料を含む樹脂組成物中の溶媒が除去される。また、樹脂材料中の成分が反応して硬化物が得られ、その硬化物を含む第1の樹脂層及び第2の樹脂層が形成される。
 前記温度は、半導体メモリーなどのデバイスへの熱によるダメージを抑制する観点から、150℃~450℃が好ましく、180℃~400℃がより好ましく、180℃~250℃がさらに好ましく、180℃~200℃が特に好ましい。
Preferably, the resin material applied to one surface of the first substrate and one surface of the second substrate is cured by heating at 100° C. to 450° C.
Note that the above-mentioned temperature refers to the temperature of the surface of the resin material applied to the surface.
By heating the resin material, the solvent in the resin composition containing the resin material is removed. Further, components in the resin material react to obtain a cured product, and a first resin layer and a second resin layer containing the cured product are formed.
The temperature is preferably 150°C to 450°C, more preferably 180°C to 400°C, even more preferably 180°C to 250°C, and even more preferably 180°C to 200°C, from the viewpoint of suppressing heat damage to devices such as semiconductor memories. C is particularly preferred.

 また、前記表面に付与された樹脂材料の加熱が行われるときの圧力には特に制限はなく、絶対圧17Pa超大気圧以下が好ましい。
 前記絶対圧は、1000Pa以上大気圧以下がより好ましく、5000Pa以上大気圧以下がさらに好ましく、10000Pa以上大気圧以下が特に好ましい。
Further, there is no particular restriction on the pressure at which the resin material applied to the surface is heated, and an absolute pressure of 17 Pa or less is preferable.
The absolute pressure is more preferably at least 1000 Pa and at most atmospheric pressure, even more preferably at least 5000 Pa and at most atmospheric pressure, particularly preferably at least 10000 Pa and at most atmospheric pressure.

 前記表面に付与された樹脂材料の加熱は、炉又はホットプレートを用いた通常の方法により行うことができる。炉としては、例えば、アペックス社製のSPX-1120、光洋サーモシステム株式会社製のVF-1000LP等を用いることができる。
 また、前記表面に付与された樹脂材料の加熱は、大気雰囲気下で行ってもよく、不活性ガス(窒素ガス、アルゴンガス、ヘリウムガス等)雰囲気下で行ってもよい。
The resin material applied to the surface can be heated by a conventional method using a furnace or a hot plate. As the furnace, for example, SPX-1120 manufactured by Apex Corporation, VF-1000LP manufactured by Koyo Thermo Systems Co., Ltd., etc. can be used.
Further, the heating of the resin material applied to the surface may be performed in an atmospheric atmosphere or in an inert gas (nitrogen gas, argon gas, helium gas, etc.) atmosphere.

 前記表面に付与された樹脂材料の加熱時間については特に制限はなく、例えば3時間以下であり、1時間以下が好ましい。加熱の時間の下限には特に制限はなく、例えば5分間とすることができる。 The heating time of the resin material applied to the surface is not particularly limited, and is, for example, 3 hours or less, preferably 1 hour or less. There is no particular restriction on the lower limit of the heating time, and it can be set to, for example, 5 minutes.

 前記表面に付与された樹脂材料の硬化時間を短縮させる目的で、前記表面上に付与された樹脂材料に紫外線(UV)照射を行ってもよい。紫外線としては波長170nm~230nmの紫外光、波長222nmエキシマ光、波長172nmエキシマ光などが好ましい。また不活性ガス雰囲気下で紫外線照射を行うことが好ましい。 In order to shorten the curing time of the resin material applied to the surface, the resin material applied to the surface may be irradiated with ultraviolet (UV) light. As the ultraviolet light, ultraviolet light with a wavelength of 170 nm to 230 nm, excimer light with a wavelength of 222 nm, excimer light with a wavelength of 172 nm, etc. are preferable. Moreover, it is preferable to perform ultraviolet irradiation under an inert gas atmosphere.

 樹脂材料が硬化しているかどうかは、例えば、特定の結合及び構造のピーク強度をFT-IR(フーリエ変換赤外分光法)で測定して確認すればよい。特定の結合及び構造としては、架橋反応により発生する結合及び構造等が挙げられる。
 例えば、アミド結合、イミド結合、シロキサン結合、テトラヒドロナフタレン構造、オキサゾール環構造等が形成された場合に、樹脂材料が硬化していると判断でき、これらの結合、構造等に由来するピーク強度をFT-IRで測定して確認すればよい。
 アミド結合は、約1650cm-1及び約1520cm-1の振動ピークの存在で確認することができる。
 イミド結合は、約1770cm-1及び約1720cm-1の振動ピークの存在で確認することができる。
 シロキサン結合は、1000cm-1~1080cm-1の間の振動ピークの存在で確認することができる。
 テトラヒドロナフタレン構造は、1500cm-1の間の振動ピークの存在で確認することができる。
 オキサゾール環構造は、約1625cm-1及び約1460cm-1の振動ピークの存在で確認することができる。
Whether the resin material is cured or not can be confirmed by, for example, measuring the peak intensity of specific bonds and structures using FT-IR (Fourier transform infrared spectroscopy). Specific bonds and structures include bonds and structures generated by crosslinking reactions.
For example, when amide bonds, imide bonds, siloxane bonds, tetrahydronaphthalene structures, oxazole ring structures, etc. are formed, it can be determined that the resin material is cured, and the peak intensities derived from these bonds, structures, etc. are measured by FT - You can confirm by measuring with IR.
The amide bond can be confirmed by the presence of vibrational peaks at about 1650 cm −1 and about 1520 cm −1 .
Imide bonds can be confirmed by the presence of vibrational peaks at about 1770 cm −1 and about 1720 cm −1 .
Siloxane bonds can be confirmed by the presence of vibrational peaks between 1000 cm −1 and 1080 cm −1 .
The tetrahydronaphthalene structure can be confirmed by the presence of vibrational peaks between 1500 cm −1 .
The oxazole ring structure can be confirmed by the presence of vibrational peaks at about 1625 cm −1 and about 1460 cm −1 .

 樹脂材料を硬化してなる第1の樹脂層及び第2の樹脂層の少なくとも一方は、シロキサン結合と、エステル結合、エーテル結合、アミド結合及びイミド結合からなる群より選択される少なくともいずれか1つとを有することが好ましく、シロキサン結合と、イミド結合とを有することがより好ましい。 At least one of the first resin layer and the second resin layer formed by curing the resin material has at least one selected from the group consisting of a siloxane bond, an ester bond, an ether bond, an amide bond, and an imide bond. It is more preferable to have a siloxane bond and an imide bond.

 樹脂材料を硬化してなる第1の樹脂層及び第2の樹脂層は、ナトリウム及びカリウムの含有量がそれぞれ元素基準で10質量ppb以下であることが好ましい。ナトリウム又はカリウムの含有量がそれぞれ元素基準で10質量ppb以下であれば、トランジスタの動作不良など半導体装置の電気特性に不都合が発生することを抑制できる。 It is preferable that the first resin layer and the second resin layer formed by curing the resin material each have a content of sodium and potassium of 10 mass ppb or less on an elemental basis. If the content of sodium or potassium is 10 mass ppb or less on an elemental basis, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconveniences in the electrical characteristics of the semiconductor device, such as malfunction of the transistor.

 第1の樹脂層及び第2の樹脂層の表面におけるシリコン量は、それぞれ独立に、20原子%以下であることが好ましく、15原子%以下であることがより好ましく、10原子%以下であることがさらに好ましい。
 樹脂層の表面におけるシリコン量はX線光電子分光装置(XPS)による原子比測定で評価できる。具体的には、XPSであるAXIS-NOVA(KRATOS社製)を用い、ワイドスペクトルにおいて検出された各元素の合計量を100%としたときの、ナロースペクトルのピーク強度から、原子比を測定することができる。
The amount of silicon on the surfaces of the first resin layer and the second resin layer is preferably 20 atom % or less, more preferably 15 atom % or less, and 10 atom % or less, each independently. is even more preferable.
The amount of silicon on the surface of the resin layer can be evaluated by measuring the atomic ratio using an X-ray photoelectron spectrometer (XPS). Specifically, using XPS AXIS-NOVA (manufactured by KRATOS), the atomic ratio is measured from the peak intensity of the narrow spectrum when the total amount of each element detected in the wide spectrum is taken as 100%. be able to.

 第1の樹脂層及び第2の樹脂層の厚さは、それぞれ独立に、0.001μm~8.0μmであることが好ましく、0.01μm~6.0μmであることがより好ましく、0.03μm~5.0μmであることがさらに好ましい。第1の樹脂層及び第2の樹脂層の厚さが0.001μm以上であることにより、第2の無機材層、その他の層等との接合強度を高めることができる。第1の樹脂層及び第2の樹脂層の厚さが8.0μm以下であることにより、大面積の基板に樹脂層を形成した場合に樹脂層の厚さバラつきを抑えることができる。 The thickness of the first resin layer and the second resin layer is preferably 0.001 μm to 8.0 μm, more preferably 0.01 μm to 6.0 μm, and 0.03 μm. More preferably, the thickness is 5.0 μm. When the thickness of the first resin layer and the second resin layer is 0.001 μm or more, the bonding strength with the second inorganic material layer, other layers, etc. can be increased. When the thickness of the first resin layer and the second resin layer is 8.0 μm or less, variations in the thickness of the resin layer can be suppressed when the resin layer is formed on a large-area substrate.

 第1の樹脂層の表面の一部及び第2の樹脂層の表面の一部に電極が設けられている場合、第1の樹脂層及び第2の樹脂層の厚さは、第2の無機材層、その他の層等との接合強度の向上並びに第1の樹脂層及び第2の樹脂層の厚さバラつきの抑制の点から、0.01μm~8.0μmであることが好ましく、0.03μm~6.0μmであることがより好ましく、0.05μm~5.0μmであることがさらに好ましい。 When electrodes are provided on a portion of the surface of the first resin layer and a portion of the surface of the second resin layer, the thickness of the first resin layer and the second resin layer is the same as that of the second resin layer. From the viewpoint of improving the bonding strength with the equipment layer, other layers, etc. and suppressing variations in the thickness of the first resin layer and the second resin layer, it is preferably 0.01 μm to 8.0 μm, and 0.01 μm to 8.0 μm. It is more preferably 0.03 μm to 6.0 μm, and even more preferably 0.05 μm to 5.0 μm.

 第1の樹脂層の表面及び第2の樹脂層の表面に電極が設けられていない場合、第1の樹脂層及び第2の樹脂層の厚さは、第2の無機材層、その他の層等との接合強度の向上並びに第1の樹脂層及び第2の樹脂層の厚さバラつきの抑制の点から、0.001μm以上1.0μm未満であることが好ましく、0.01μm~0.8μmであることがより好ましく、0.03μm~0.6μmであることがさらに好ましい。 When electrodes are not provided on the surface of the first resin layer and the surface of the second resin layer, the thickness of the first resin layer and the second resin layer is the same as that of the second inorganic material layer and the other layers. From the viewpoint of improving the bonding strength with the like and suppressing variations in the thickness of the first resin layer and the second resin layer, it is preferably 0.001 μm or more and less than 1.0 μm, and 0.01 μm to 0.8 μm. More preferably, it is 0.03 μm to 0.6 μm.

 第1の樹脂層は、後述の第1の樹脂層と第2の無機材層との仮固定を低温で行うことを容易にすると共に、基板積層体における第1積層体と第2積層体との接合強度を高める点から、第1の樹脂層の表面に化学的結合を形成し得る官能基を有することが好ましく、シラノール基(Si-OH基)、アミノ基、エポキシ基、水酸基及び不飽和結合を有する官能基からなる群より選択される少なくとも1つの官能基を有することがより好ましく、耐熱性の点から、シラノール基を有することがさらに好ましい。これらの官能基は、第1の樹脂層形成後に表面処理により形成してもよく、シランカップリング剤処理等により形成してもよい。あるいは、これらの官能基を含む化合物を樹脂組成物中に混合させてもよい。
 なお、不飽和結合を有する官能基としては、ビニル基、アリル基、アクリル基、メタクリル基、スチリル基等が挙げられる。
 第2の樹脂層は、第2の樹脂層の表面に化学的結合を形成し得る前述の官能基を有していてもよい。
The first resin layer facilitates temporarily fixing the first resin layer and the second inorganic material layer, which will be described later, at a low temperature, and also allows the first laminate and the second laminate in the substrate laminate to be easily fixed together. In order to increase the bonding strength of It is more preferable to have at least one functional group selected from the group consisting of functional groups having a bond, and from the viewpoint of heat resistance, it is even more preferable to have a silanol group. These functional groups may be formed by surface treatment after forming the first resin layer, or may be formed by treatment with a silane coupling agent or the like. Alternatively, compounds containing these functional groups may be mixed into the resin composition.
Note that examples of the functional group having an unsaturated bond include a vinyl group, an allyl group, an acrylic group, a methacryl group, and a styryl group.
The second resin layer may have the above-mentioned functional group capable of forming a chemical bond on the surface of the second resin layer.

 樹脂層の表面がSi-OH基を有するか否かは、飛行時間型二次イオン質量分析法(TOF-SIMS)による樹脂層の表面分析で評価できる。具体的には、TOF-SIMSであるPHI nanoTOFII(アルバック・ファイ株式会社)を用い、質量電荷比(m/Z)45のピークの有無から、樹脂層の表面がSi-OH基を有するか否かを評価できる。 Whether or not the surface of the resin layer has Si-OH groups can be evaluated by surface analysis of the resin layer using time-of-flight secondary ion mass spectrometry (TOF-SIMS). Specifically, using PHI nanoTOFII (ULVAC-PHI Co., Ltd.), which is a TOF-SIMS, it was determined whether the surface of the resin layer had Si-OH groups based on the presence or absence of a peak at a mass-to-charge ratio (m/Z) of 45. can be evaluated.

 第1の樹脂層又は第2の樹脂層を形成後、第1の樹脂層及び第2の樹脂層の少なくとも一方の表面を平坦化してもよい。平坦化する方法としては、フライカット法、化学的機械研磨法(CMP)等が挙げられる。平坦化する方法は、1つの方法を単独で用いてもよいし、2つ以上の方法を併用してもよい。 After forming the first resin layer or the second resin layer, the surface of at least one of the first resin layer and the second resin layer may be flattened. Examples of the flattening method include a fly cut method, chemical mechanical polishing (CMP), and the like. As for the flattening method, one method may be used alone, or two or more methods may be used in combination.

 第1の樹脂層又は第2の樹脂層を形成後、第1の樹脂層及び第2の樹脂層の少なくとも一方の表面を洗浄してもよい。洗浄方法は、リンス液による湿式洗浄、プラズマ等による乾式洗浄等が挙げられる。湿式洗浄としては、例えば、純水を用いた超音波洗浄、NMP等の溶剤を用いたスピン洗浄などが挙げられる。 After forming the first resin layer or the second resin layer, the surface of at least one of the first resin layer and the second resin layer may be washed. Examples of the cleaning method include wet cleaning using a rinsing liquid and dry cleaning using plasma or the like. Examples of wet cleaning include ultrasonic cleaning using pure water, spin cleaning using a solvent such as NMP, and the like.

(第1の無機材層及び第2の無機材層)
 第1の無機材層は、第1の基板のもう一方の表面に配置されている層であり、第2の無機材層は、第2の基板のもう一方の表面に配置されている層である。例えば、第1の基板の一方の面に第1の樹脂層を形成した後に、第1の基板のもう一方の面に第1の無機材層を形成してもよく、反対に第1の無機材層を形成した後に第1の樹脂層を形成してもよい。第2の基板についても同様であり、第2の樹脂層及び第2の無機材層を形成する順番は特に限定されない。
(First inorganic layer and second inorganic layer)
The first inorganic material layer is a layer disposed on the other surface of the first substrate, and the second inorganic material layer is a layer disposed on the other surface of the second substrate. be. For example, after forming the first resin layer on one surface of the first substrate, the first inorganic material layer may be formed on the other surface of the first substrate; The first resin layer may be formed after forming the equipment layer. The same applies to the second substrate, and the order in which the second resin layer and the second inorganic material layer are formed is not particularly limited.

 第1の無機材層及び第2の無機材層の材質は、特に限定されず、例えば、半導体基板にて無機材料同士を接合する際に採用される無機材料の材質であればよい。具体的には、第1の無機材層及び第2の無機材層は、それぞれ独立に、Si、Al、Ti、Zr、Hf、Fe、Ni、Cu、Ag、Au、Ga、Ge、Sn、Pd、As、Pt、Mg、In、Ta及びNbからなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の元素を含んでいてもよく、Si、Ga、Ge及びAsからなる群より選択される少なくとも1種の元素を含むことが好ましい。第1の無機材層及び第2の無機材層には、前述の元素の酸化物、炭化物、窒化物等が含まれていてもよい。
 第1の無機材層及び第2の無機材層の材質は、同じであってもよく、異なっていてもよい。
The materials of the first inorganic layer and the second inorganic layer are not particularly limited, and may be any inorganic material that is used when bonding inorganic materials in a semiconductor substrate, for example. Specifically, the first inorganic material layer and the second inorganic material layer each independently include Si, Al, Ti, Zr, Hf, Fe, Ni, Cu, Ag, Au, Ga, Ge, Sn, It may contain at least one element selected from the group consisting of Pd, As, Pt, Mg, In, Ta and Nb, and at least one element selected from the group consisting of Si, Ga, Ge and As. It is preferable to include. The first inorganic layer and the second inorganic layer may contain oxides, carbides, nitrides, etc. of the above-mentioned elements.
The materials of the first inorganic layer and the second inorganic layer may be the same or different.

 基板の表面に無機材層を形成する方法は特に限定されず、従来公知の無機材層の形成方法が挙げられる。例えば、CVD、スパッタリング、AGD(エアロゾル化ガスデポジション)、ゾルゲル法、陽極酸化処理、熱分解法等が挙げられる。 The method for forming the inorganic layer on the surface of the substrate is not particularly limited, and includes conventionally known methods for forming an inorganic layer. Examples include CVD, sputtering, AGD (aerosolized gas deposition), sol-gel method, anodizing treatment, thermal decomposition method, and the like.

(電極)
 第1の積層体は、第1の樹脂層の表面の一部及び第1の無機材層の表面の一部に電極を備えていてもよく、第2の積層体は、第2の樹脂層の表面の一部及び第2の無機材層の表面の一部に電極を備えていてもよい。工程Bにて、第1の樹脂層側に設けられた電極は第2の無機材層に設けられた電極と接触するように各電極が配置されていることが好ましい。
(electrode)
The first laminate may include an electrode on a portion of the surface of the first resin layer and a portion of the surface of the first inorganic layer, and the second laminate may include an electrode on a portion of the surface of the first resin layer and a portion of the surface of the first inorganic layer. An electrode may be provided on a part of the surface of the second inorganic material layer and a part of the surface of the second inorganic material layer. In step B, it is preferable that each electrode is arranged so that the electrode provided on the first resin layer side is in contact with the electrode provided on the second inorganic material layer.

 第1の積層体における第1の樹脂層側の面から第1の無機材層側の面に向かって貫通孔が設けられ、当該貫通孔に前記第1の積層体を貫通する電極が設けられていてもよい。第2の積層体における第2の樹脂層側の面から第2の無機材層側の面に向かって貫通孔が設けられ、当該貫通孔に前記第2の積層体を貫通する電極が設けられていてもよい。 A through hole is provided in the first laminate from the surface on the first resin layer side to the surface on the first inorganic material layer side, and an electrode passing through the first laminate is provided in the through hole. You can leave it there. A through hole is provided in the second laminate from the surface on the second resin layer side to the surface on the second inorganic material layer side, and an electrode passing through the second laminate is provided in the through hole. You can leave it there.

 電極の材料としては、特に限定されず、従来公知の電極材料等が挙げられる。具体的には、銅、はんだ、すず、金、銀、アルミニウム、インジウム、コバルト、タングステン等が挙げられる。 The material of the electrode is not particularly limited, and conventionally known electrode materials may be used. Specific examples include copper, solder, tin, gold, silver, aluminum, indium, cobalt, and tungsten.

 第1の積層体及び第2の積層体に電極を設ける方法は特に限定されず、従来公知の方法を採用することができる。
 第1の積層体にて、第1の樹脂層が形成される前に樹脂材料が塗布される面に電極を形成してもよく、第1の樹脂層が形成された後に第1の樹脂層が形成された面に電極を形成してもよい。第2の積層体についても同様である。
 第1の積層体にて、第1の無機材層が形成される前に無機材層が形成される面に電極を形成してもよく、第1の無機材層が形成された後に第1の無機材層が形成された面に電極を形成してもよい。第2の積層体についても同様である。
The method of providing electrodes on the first laminate and the second laminate is not particularly limited, and conventionally known methods can be employed.
In the first laminate, an electrode may be formed on the surface to which the resin material is applied before the first resin layer is formed, and an electrode may be formed on the surface to which the resin material is applied before the first resin layer is formed. An electrode may be formed on the surface on which is formed. The same applies to the second laminate.
In the first laminate, an electrode may be formed on the surface on which the inorganic layer is formed before the first inorganic layer is formed; An electrode may be formed on the surface on which the inorganic material layer is formed. The same applies to the second laminate.

 電極は、第1の基板又は第2の基板の表面上に凸状に形成されていてもよく、第1の基板又は第2の基板を貫通する状態で形成されていてもよく、第1の基板又は第2の基板に埋め込まれた状態で形成されていてもよい。 The electrode may be formed in a convex shape on the surface of the first substrate or the second substrate, or may be formed penetrating the first substrate or the second substrate. It may be formed embedded in the substrate or the second substrate.

 樹脂層が形成される前又は無機材層が形成される前に電極が形成されている場合、電極上の樹脂層又は無機材層を除去することで樹脂層の表面の一部又は無機材層の表面の一部に電極を備える構成となる。通電層上の樹脂層又は無機材層の除去方法としては、フライカット法、化学的機械研磨法(CMP)、プラズマドライエッチング等が挙げられる。除去方法は、1つの方法を単独で用いてもよいし、2つ以上の方法を併用してもよい。例えば、フライカット法では、サーフェースプレーナー(DFS8910(株式会社ディスコ製))等を使用することができる。CMPを用いる場合、スラリとしては、例えば、一般的に樹脂の研磨に用いられるシリカ又はアルミナが配合されたスラリ、金属の研磨に用いられる過酸化水素及びシリカが配合されたスラリ等を用いてもよい。プラズマドライエッチングを用いる場合、フルオロカーボンプラズマ、酸素プラズマ等を用いてもよい。 If the electrode is formed before the resin layer or inorganic layer is formed, removing the resin layer or inorganic layer on the electrode will remove a part of the surface of the resin layer or the inorganic layer. The structure includes an electrode on a part of the surface. Examples of methods for removing the resin layer or inorganic layer on the current-carrying layer include fly-cutting, chemical mechanical polishing (CMP), and plasma dry etching. As for the removal method, one method may be used alone, or two or more methods may be used in combination. For example, in the fly cut method, a surface planer (DFS8910 (manufactured by DISCO Co., Ltd.)) or the like can be used. When using CMP, the slurry may be, for example, a slurry containing silica or alumina, which is generally used for polishing resins, or a slurry containing hydrogen peroxide and silica, which is used for polishing metals. good. When using plasma dry etching, fluorocarbon plasma, oxygen plasma, etc. may be used.

 電極表面上の樹脂層又は無機材層を除去し、電極を露出させた場合、必要に応じて、電極表面の酸化物の還元処理を行ってもよい。還元処理方法としては、ギ酸などの酸雰囲気中で基板を100℃~300℃で加熱する方法、水素雰囲気中で基板を加熱する方法等がある。これらの処理は後述する工程Cと同時に行ってもよい。 When the resin layer or inorganic layer on the electrode surface is removed to expose the electrode, the oxide on the electrode surface may be reduced if necessary. Examples of reduction treatment methods include a method of heating the substrate at 100° C. to 300° C. in an acid atmosphere such as formic acid, a method of heating the substrate in a hydrogen atmosphere, and the like. These treatments may be performed simultaneously with Step C, which will be described later.

 樹脂層が形成された後又は無機材層が形成された後に電極が形成されている場合、例えば、基板の樹脂層が形成された面又は基板の無機材層が形成された面に対して電極が形成される孔を公知の方法で形成し、形成された孔に電極を形成してもよい。孔の形成方法としては、ガスを使用して行われるドライエッチング、レーザーアブレーション等が挙げられる。 When an electrode is formed after a resin layer or an inorganic layer is formed, for example, the electrode is placed on the surface of the substrate on which the resin layer is formed or on the surface of the substrate on which the inorganic material layer is formed. It is also possible to form a hole in which is formed using a known method, and then form an electrode in the formed hole. Examples of methods for forming the holes include dry etching using gas, laser ablation, and the like.

 電極の形成方法としては、電界めっき、無電解めっき、スパッタリング、インクジェット法等が挙げられる。 Examples of methods for forming the electrodes include electroplating, electroless plating, sputtering, and inkjet methods.

 樹脂材料が感光性を有する場合、第1の基板及び第2の基板の少なくとも一方に付与された樹脂材料にフォトリソグラフィで電極が形成される孔を形成してもよい。当該樹脂材料を硬化して第1の樹脂層及び第2の樹脂層の少なくとも一方を形成した後、形成された孔に電極を形成してもよい。 When the resin material is photosensitive, holes in which electrodes are formed may be formed by photolithography in the resin material applied to at least one of the first substrate and the second substrate. After the resin material is cured to form at least one of the first resin layer and the second resin layer, electrodes may be formed in the formed holes.

 第1の積層体及び第2の積層体は、必要に応じて、ダイシング加工を行うことで個片化された積層体であってもよい。例えば、ダイシング加工では、ダイサー(DAD6340(株式会社ディスコ製))等を使用することができる。 The first laminate and the second laminate may be laminates separated into individual pieces by performing a dicing process, if necessary. For example, in the dicing process, a dicer (DAD6340 (manufactured by DISCO Corporation)) or the like can be used.

[工程B]
 本開示の基板積層体の製造方法は、第1の積層体の第1の樹脂層と第2の積層体の第2の無機材層とを接触させて第1の積層体及び第2の積層体を積層する工程Bを含む。
[Process B]
The method for manufacturing a substrate laminate of the present disclosure includes contacting the first resin layer of the first laminate and the second inorganic material layer of the second laminate to form the first laminate and the second laminate. It includes step B of laminating the bodies.

 工程Bは、後述の工程Cにて第1の積層体及び第2の積層体を第1の樹脂層及び第2の無機材層を介して接合する前に、第1の樹脂層と第2の無機材層とを接触させる工程である。第1の積層体及び第2の積層体を接合した際に所望の位置関係となるように、第1の積層体及び第2の積層体を接触させる。 In step B, before joining the first laminate and the second laminate via the first resin layer and the second inorganic material layer in step C, which will be described later, the first resin layer and the second laminate are bonded together. This is the step of bringing the inorganic material layer into contact with the inorganic material layer. The first laminate and the second laminate are brought into contact so that a desired positional relationship is achieved when the first laminate and the second laminate are joined.

 例えば、第1の積層体及び第2の積層体に前述の電極がそれぞれ設けられている場合、第1の樹脂層側に設けられた電極が第2の無機材層に設けられた電極と接触するように第1の積層体及び第2の積層体を接触させることが好ましい。 For example, when the above-mentioned electrodes are provided on the first laminate and the second laminate, the electrode provided on the first resin layer comes into contact with the electrode provided on the second inorganic material layer. It is preferable that the first laminate and the second laminate are brought into contact with each other so that the first laminate and the second laminate are brought into contact with each other.

 工程Bにおける第1の樹脂層と第2の無機材層とを接触させる前にて、第1の樹脂層の硬化率は、70%以上100%以下であることが好ましい。これにより、後述の工程Cにて第1の積層体及び第2の積層体を強固に接合し、かつ、接合の位置ずれ(アライメントのずれ)がより発生しにくくなる傾向にある。 Before the first resin layer and the second inorganic layer are brought into contact in step B, the curing rate of the first resin layer is preferably 70% or more and 100% or less. As a result, the first laminate and the second laminate are firmly bonded in Step C, which will be described later, and there is a tendency for bonding positional deviation (alignment deviation) to be less likely to occur.

 第1の樹脂層の硬化率は、80%以上であることがより好ましく、85%以上であることがさらに好ましく、90%以上であることが特に好ましく、93%以上であることがより一層好ましい。また、第1の樹脂層の硬化率は、100%であってもよく、99%以下であってもよく、95%以下であってもよく、90%以下であってもよい。
 また、第2の樹脂層の硬化率の好ましい範囲は、第1の樹脂層の硬化率の好ましい範囲と同様である。第2の樹脂層の硬化率は、他の層(例えば、他の無機材層)と接触させる前の硬化率であってもよい。
The curing rate of the first resin layer is more preferably 80% or more, even more preferably 85% or more, particularly preferably 90% or more, and even more preferably 93% or more. . Further, the curing rate of the first resin layer may be 100%, 99% or less, 95% or less, or 90% or less.
Moreover, the preferable range of the curing rate of the second resin layer is the same as the preferable range of the curing rate of the first resin layer. The curing rate of the second resin layer may be the curing rate before contacting with another layer (for example, another inorganic material layer).

 アミド結合、イミド結合、シロキサン結合、テトラヒドロナフタレン構造、オキサゾール環構造、エステル結合及びエーテル結合からなる群より選択される少なくとも1種を含む樹脂層(第1の樹脂層及び第2の樹脂層の少なくとも一方)の硬化率は、80%以上であることがより好ましく、85%以上であることがさらに好ましく、90%以上であることが特に好ましく、93%以上であることがより一層好ましい。シロキサン結合と、エステル結合、エーテル結合、アミド結合及びイミド結合からなる群より選択される少なくともいずれか1つとを含む樹脂層(第1の樹脂層及び第2の樹脂層の少なくとも一方)の硬化率は、80%以上であることがより好ましく、85%以上であることがさらに好ましく、90%以上であることが特に好ましく、93%以上であることがより一層好ましい。 A resin layer containing at least one member selected from the group consisting of an amide bond, an imide bond, a siloxane bond, a tetrahydronaphthalene structure, an oxazole ring structure, an ester bond, and an ether bond (at least of the first resin layer and the second resin layer). The curing rate of (on the other hand) is more preferably 80% or more, even more preferably 85% or more, particularly preferably 90% or more, and even more preferably 93% or more. Curing rate of a resin layer (at least one of the first resin layer and the second resin layer) containing a siloxane bond and at least one selected from the group consisting of an ester bond, an ether bond, an amide bond, and an imide bond is more preferably 80% or more, even more preferably 85% or more, particularly preferably 90% or more, and even more preferably 93% or more.

 樹脂材料を硬化してなる第1の樹脂層の硬化率は、例えば、第1の基板に付与する前の樹脂材料、工程Bにおける第1の樹脂層と第2の無機材層とを接触させる前の第1の樹脂層、及び工程C後の第1の樹脂層にて、特定の結合及び構造のピーク強度(イミド、アミド等のように複数のピークを有する場合はそれらピーク強度の合計)をFT-IR(フーリエ変換赤外分光法)で測定し、ピーク強度の増加率又は減少率を求めて確認してもよい。なお、シロキサン結合等の様にピーク分離が困難な帯状のピークを有する場合、最大のピーク強度を採用すればよい。 The curing rate of the first resin layer formed by curing the resin material is, for example, the resin material before being applied to the first substrate, the first resin layer and the second inorganic layer in step B being brought into contact with each other. In the previous first resin layer and the first resin layer after step C, the peak intensity of a specific bond and structure (if there are multiple peaks such as imide, amide, etc., the sum of those peak intensities) It may be confirmed by measuring by FT-IR (Fourier transform infrared spectroscopy) and determining the rate of increase or decrease in peak intensity. Note that in the case of a band-like peak that is difficult to separate, such as a siloxane bond, the maximum peak intensity may be used.

 具体的には、硬化反応により特定の結合及び構造が発生する場合、ピーク強度の増加率を以下の式により算出し、その算出した値を第1の樹脂層の硬化率としてもよい。
 ピーク強度の増加率(第1の樹脂層の硬化率)=[(工程Bにおける第1の樹脂層と第2の無機材層とを接触させる前の第1の樹脂層の特定の結合及び構造のピーク強度)/(工程Cにて300℃1時間加熱した後の第1の樹脂層の特定の結合及び構造のピーク強度)]×100
 なお、バックグラウンド信号除去については通常の方法により行えばよい。また、必要に応じてFT-IR測定は透過法又は反射法により行うことができる。
Specifically, when specific bonds and structures are generated by the curing reaction, the rate of increase in peak intensity may be calculated using the following formula, and the calculated value may be used as the curing rate of the first resin layer.
Rate of increase in peak intensity (curing rate of the first resin layer) = [(Specific bond and structure of the first resin layer before contacting the first resin layer and the second inorganic layer in step B) peak intensity)/(peak intensity of specific bond and structure of the first resin layer after heating at 300°C for 1 hour in step C)]×100
Note that background signal removal may be performed using a normal method. Further, the FT-IR measurement can be performed by a transmission method or a reflection method, if necessary.

 前述のピーク強度の増加率では、ピーク強度の増加生じる結合及び構造が複数存在する場合、ピーク強度を複数のピーク強度の合計強度と読み替えてもよい。 In the above-mentioned rate of increase in peak intensity, if there are multiple bonds and structures that cause an increase in peak intensity, the peak intensity may be read as the total intensity of the multiple peak intensities.

 工程Bにおける第1の樹脂層と第2の無機材層とを接触させる前にて、第1の樹脂層の23℃における複合弾性率は、0.1GPa以上20GPa以下であることが好ましく、0.1GPa以上10GPa以下であることがより好ましい。これにより、工程Bにて第1の樹脂層と第2の無機材層とを接触させた際に形成される空隙が、工程Cにて第1の樹脂層に吸収されてボイドの発生が抑制される傾向にある。また、これにより、後述の第1の樹脂層と第2の無機材層との仮固定を低温で行うことが容易となる。 Before the first resin layer and the second inorganic layer are brought into contact in step B, the composite modulus of elasticity of the first resin layer at 23°C is preferably 0.1 GPa or more and 20 GPa or less, and 0. More preferably, it is .1 GPa or more and 10 GPa or less. As a result, the voids formed when the first resin layer and the second inorganic layer are brought into contact in step B are absorbed by the first resin layer in step C, suppressing the generation of voids. There is a tendency to Moreover, this makes it easy to temporarily fix the first resin layer and the second inorganic material layer, which will be described later, at a low temperature.

 前述の第1の樹脂層の23℃における複合弾性率は、ボイドの発生を好適に抑制する点から、8GPa以下が好ましく、6GPa以下がより好ましい。また、前述の第1の樹脂層の23℃における複合弾性率は、アラインメントのずれを好適に抑制する点から、0.1GPa以上が好ましく、1GPa以上がより好ましい。
 また、第2の樹脂層の23℃における複合弾性率の好ましい範囲は、第1の樹脂層の23℃における複合弾性率の好ましい範囲と同様である。第2の樹脂層の23℃における複合弾性率は、他の層(例えば、他の無機材層)と接触させる前の23℃における複合弾性率であってもよい。
The composite modulus of elasticity of the first resin layer at 23° C. is preferably 8 GPa or less, more preferably 6 GPa or less, from the viewpoint of suitably suppressing the generation of voids. Further, the composite modulus of elasticity of the first resin layer at 23° C. is preferably 0.1 GPa or more, more preferably 1 GPa or more, from the viewpoint of suitably suppressing misalignment.
Further, the preferable range of the composite modulus of the second resin layer at 23°C is the same as the preferable range of the composite modulus of the first resin layer at 23°C. The composite modulus of elasticity at 23° C. of the second resin layer may be the composite modulus at 23° C. before contacting with another layer (for example, another inorganic material layer).

 樹脂層の23℃における複合弾性率は、以下に記載の方法により測定することができる。
 樹脂材料を含む樹脂組成物を調製し、シリコン基板にスピン塗布し、次いで、400℃で10分加熱することにより測定サンプルを準備する。準備した測定サンプルについて、ナノインデンテーター(商品名TI-950 Tribo Indenter、Hysitron社製、Berkovich型圧子)を用い、試験深さ20nmの条件にて23℃における除荷-変位曲線を測定し、参考文献(Handbook of Micro/nano Tribology (second Edition)、Bharat Bhushan編、CRCプレス社)の計算手法に従い、最大負荷及び最大変位から、23℃における複合弾性率を計算により求める。
 なお、ここで、複合弾性率は下記式(1)により定義される。式(1)中、Eは複合弾性率を表し、Eは圧子のヤング率を表し、1140GPaであり、νは圧子のポアソン比を表し、0.07であり、E及びνはそれぞれ試料のヤング率及びポアソン比を表す。
The composite elastic modulus of the resin layer at 23° C. can be measured by the method described below.
A measurement sample is prepared by preparing a resin composition containing a resin material, spin-coating it on a silicon substrate, and then heating it at 400° C. for 10 minutes. For the prepared measurement sample, the unloading-displacement curve at 23°C was measured at a test depth of 20 nm using a nanoindentator (trade name TI-950 Tribo Indenter, manufactured by Hysitron, Berkovich type indenter), and the unloading-displacement curve was determined as a reference. According to the calculation method in the literature (Handbook of Micro/nano Tribology (second edition), edited by Bharat Bhushan, CRC Press), the composite modulus at 23°C is calculated from the maximum load and maximum displacement.
Note that here, the composite modulus of elasticity is defined by the following formula (1). In formula (1), E r represents the composite modulus of elasticity, E i represents the Young's modulus of the indenter and is 1140 GPa, ν i represents the Poisson's ratio of the indenter and is 0.07, E s and ν s represent the Young's modulus and Poisson's ratio of the sample, respectively.

 工程Bにおける第1の樹脂層と第2の無機材層とを接触させる前にて、第1の樹脂層の表面粗度(Ra)は、0.01nm以上1.2nm以下であることが好ましく、0.1nm以上1.0nm以下であることがより好ましい。これにより、後述の第1の樹脂層と第2の無機材層との仮固定が低温で行うことが容易となる。
 また、第2の樹脂層の表面粗度(Ra)の好ましい範囲は、第1の樹脂層の表面粗度(Ra)の好ましい範囲と同様である。第2の樹脂層の表面粗度(Ra)は、他の層(例えば、他の無機材層)と接触させる前の表面粗度(Ra)であってもよい。
 樹脂層の表面粗度は走査型プローブ顕微鏡(SPM)による形態観察で評価できる。具体的には、SPMであるSPA400(日立ハイテクノロジーズ製)を用い、ダイナミックフォースマイクロスコープモードにて、3μm×3μm角領域で測定を行うことで表面粗度が求められる。
Before the first resin layer and the second inorganic layer are brought into contact in step B, the surface roughness (Ra) of the first resin layer is preferably 0.01 nm or more and 1.2 nm or less. , more preferably 0.1 nm or more and 1.0 nm or less. This makes it easy to temporarily fix the first resin layer and the second inorganic material layer, which will be described later, at a low temperature.
Moreover, the preferable range of the surface roughness (Ra) of the second resin layer is the same as the preferable range of the surface roughness (Ra) of the first resin layer. The surface roughness (Ra) of the second resin layer may be the surface roughness (Ra) before contacting with another layer (for example, another inorganic material layer).
The surface roughness of the resin layer can be evaluated by morphological observation using a scanning probe microscope (SPM). Specifically, the surface roughness is determined by measuring a 3 μm×3 μm square area using SPM SPA400 (manufactured by Hitachi High-Technologies) in dynamic force microscope mode.

 本開示の基板積層体の製造方法は、前述の工程Bの前に、以下に記載する各種工程を含んでいてもよい。以下の各種工程は、工程Aの後かつ工程Bの前に行われることが好ましい。 The method for manufacturing a substrate laminate of the present disclosure may include various steps described below before the above-mentioned step B. The following various steps are preferably performed after step A and before step B.

 本開示の基板積層体の製造方法は、工程Bの前に、第2の無機材層に表面活性化処理を施す工程を含んでいてもよい。表面活性化処理を施すことによって、第1の樹脂層と第2の無機材層との接合強度を高めることができる。特に、第1の積層体及び第2の積層体の接合面に電極を設け、電極同士を接合する際、電極に含まれる銅等の金属の拡散を促進して電極同士の接合強度を高める観点、及び、金属拡散の際の加熱温度を低減させる点から、表面活性化処理を施すことが好ましい。
 また、第1の基板における第1の無機材層についても表面活性化処理を施してもよく、特に、第1の無機材層を他の層(例えば、他の樹脂層)と接合する場合に、接合前に第1の無機材層についても表面活性化処理を施してもよい。
The method for manufacturing a substrate laminate according to the present disclosure may include, before step B, a step of subjecting the second inorganic material layer to a surface activation treatment. By performing the surface activation treatment, the bonding strength between the first resin layer and the second inorganic layer can be increased. In particular, when electrodes are provided on the bonding surfaces of the first laminate and the second laminate and the electrodes are bonded together, the viewpoint is to promote the diffusion of metal such as copper contained in the electrodes and to increase the bonding strength between the electrodes. From the viewpoint of reducing the heating temperature during metal diffusion, it is preferable to perform a surface activation treatment.
Furthermore, the first inorganic layer in the first substrate may also be subjected to surface activation treatment, especially when the first inorganic layer is bonded to another layer (for example, another resin layer). , the first inorganic material layer may also be subjected to surface activation treatment before bonding.

 表面活性化処理の具体例としては、プラズマ処理、FAB(Fast Atom Bombardment、高速原子衝撃)処理等が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the surface activation treatment include plasma treatment, FAB (Fast Atom Bombardment) treatment, and the like.

 本開示の基板積層体の製造方法は、工程Bの前に、パーティクル等を除去する点から、第2の無機材層を洗浄する工程を含んでいてもよい。前述の洗浄する工程は、前記表面処理を施す工程の後、かつ工程Bの前に行われることが好ましい。
 また、第1の基板における第1の無機材層を洗浄してもよく、特に、第1の無機材層を他の層(例えば、他の樹脂層)と接合する場合に、接合前に第1の無機材層を洗浄してもよい。
The method for manufacturing a substrate laminate according to the present disclosure may include, before step B, a step of cleaning the second inorganic material layer in order to remove particles and the like. The above-mentioned cleaning step is preferably performed after the surface treatment step and before step B.
Furthermore, the first inorganic layer on the first substrate may be cleaned. In particular, when the first inorganic layer is bonded to another layer (for example, another resin layer), the first inorganic layer may be cleaned before bonding. You may wash the first inorganic material layer.

 洗浄方法は特に限定されず、アルカリ性洗浄液、酸性洗浄液、フッ酸含有洗浄液、過マンガン酸含有液(デスミア液)等の溶剤を用いた湿式洗浄、純水等を用いた湿式洗浄、UVオゾン、プラズマ等による乾式洗浄などが挙げられる。 The cleaning method is not particularly limited, and may include wet cleaning using a solvent such as alkaline cleaning solution, acidic cleaning solution, hydrofluoric acid-containing cleaning solution, permanganic acid-containing solution (desmear solution), wet cleaning using pure water, etc., UV ozone, plasma. For example, dry cleaning by etc.

 本開示の基板積層体の製造方法は、工程Bの前に、無機材層上の異物付着を防止する点(例えば、ダイシング加工時の異物付着を防止する点)から、第2の無機材層に表面保護層を設ける工程を含んでいてもよい。表面保護層を設ける工程は、前述の洗浄する工程の前、かつ工程Bの前に行われることが好ましい。 The method for manufacturing a substrate laminate of the present disclosure includes, before step B, a second inorganic layer, which prevents foreign matter from adhering to the inorganic layer (for example, from preventing foreign matter from adhering during dicing). The method may include a step of providing a surface protective layer on the surface. The step of providing a surface protective layer is preferably performed before the above-mentioned cleaning step and before step B.

 表面保護層としては、前記第2の無機材層を保護可能であれば特に限定されず、水溶性樹脂、NMP(N-メチル-2-ピロリドン)等の有機溶剤で洗浄可能なフォトレジストなどが挙げられる。水溶性樹脂としては、Disco社のHogomaxを使用してもよい。 The surface protective layer is not particularly limited as long as it can protect the second inorganic layer, and may include a water-soluble resin, a photoresist that can be cleaned with an organic solvent such as NMP (N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone), etc. Can be mentioned. As the water-soluble resin, Hogomax from Disco may be used.

 表面保護層を設けた第2の積層体について、必要に応じてダイシング加工を行い、ダイシング加工後に表面保護層を剥離してもよい。この場合、ダイシング加工後に表面保護層を剥離し、表面保護層の剥離後に前述の洗浄する工程、工程Bの順番で処理が行われることが好ましい。 The second laminate provided with the surface protective layer may be subjected to dicing as necessary, and the surface protective layer may be peeled off after the dicing. In this case, it is preferable that the surface protective layer is peeled off after the dicing process, and the above-mentioned cleaning step and step B are performed in this order after the surface protective layer is peeled off.

 本開示の基板積層体の製造方法は、工程Bの後、かつ工程Cの前に、第1の積層体及び第2の積層体を仮固定する工程を含んでいてもよい。第1の積層体及び第2の積層体の仮固定は、室温以上100℃以下の低温で行うことが好ましく、室温以上、50℃以下の低温で行うことがより好ましく、室温で行うことがさらに好ましい。 The method for manufacturing a substrate laminate of the present disclosure may include a step of temporarily fixing the first laminate and the second laminate after step B and before step C. Temporary fixing of the first laminate and the second laminate is preferably carried out at a low temperature between room temperature and 100°C, more preferably between room temperature and 50°C, and more preferably at room temperature. preferable.

 第1の基板及び第2の基板がシリコン基板を有する場合、第1の積層体及び第2の積層体を仮固定した状態での両積層体の接合界面の表面エネルギーは、工程Cにおける取り扱いのしやすさ、アラインメントずれ(接合位置ずれ)抑制、異物混入の抑制等の点から、0.05J/m以上であることが好ましく、0.1J/m以上であることがより好ましく、0.15J/m以上であることがさらに好ましい。
 前述の接合界面の表面エネルギー(接合強度)は、非特許文献M.P.Maszara, G.Goetz, A.Cavigila, and J.B.Mckitterick, Journal of Applied Physics, 64 (1988) 4943-4950. の手法に従って、ブレード挿入試験で求めることができる。仮固定した積層体の接合界面に、厚さ0.1mm~0.3mmのブレードを挿入し、赤外線光源と赤外線カメラにて、ブレード刃先から積層体が剥離した距離の測定を行う。その後、以下に式に基づいて表面エネルギーを求めればよい。
 γ=3×10×t ×E×t/(32×L×E×t
 ここで、γは表面エネルギー(J/m)、tはブレード厚さ(m)、Eは第1の基板及び第2の基板に含まれるシリコン基板のヤング率(GPa)、tは第1の基板及び第2の基板の厚さ(m)、Lはブレード刃先からの積層体剥離距離(m)を表す。
When the first substrate and the second substrate have silicon substrates, the surface energy of the bonding interface between the first and second laminates is determined by the handling in step C. From the viewpoint of ease of assembly, suppression of misalignment (displacement of bonding position), suppression of foreign matter contamination, etc., it is preferably 0.05 J/m 2 or more, more preferably 0.1 J/m 2 or more, and 0. More preferably, it is .15 J/m 2 or more.
The surface energy (bond strength) of the bond interface mentioned above was determined by a blade insertion test according to the method in the non-patent document MP Maszara, G. Goetz, A. Cavigila, and JBMckitterick, Journal of Applied Physics, 64 (1988) 4943-4950. You can ask for it. A blade with a thickness of 0.1 mm to 0.3 mm is inserted into the joint interface of the temporarily fixed laminate, and the distance at which the laminate separates from the blade edge is measured using an infrared light source and an infrared camera. After that, the surface energy may be determined based on the following formula.
γ=3× 109 × tb2 × E2 × t6 /(32× L4 ×E× t3 )
Here, γ is the surface energy (J/m 2 ), t b is the blade thickness (m), E is the Young's modulus (GPa) of the silicon substrate included in the first substrate and the second substrate, and t is the The thicknesses (m) of the first substrate and the second substrate, and L represent the peeling distance (m) of the laminate from the blade edge.

[工程C]
 本開示の基板積層体の製造方法は、工程Bの後に、第1の積層体及び第2の積層体を100℃以上で加熱する工程Cを含む。これにより、第1の積層体と第2の積層体とが、第1の樹脂層と第2の無機材層とを介して接合した基板積層体が得られる。
[Process C]
The method for manufacturing a substrate laminate of the present disclosure includes, after step B, step C of heating the first laminate and the second laminate at 100° C. or higher. Thereby, a substrate laminate is obtained in which the first laminate and the second laminate are joined via the first resin layer and the second inorganic material layer.

 第1の積層体と第2の積層体とを接合するときの圧力は特に制限はなく、絶対圧10-4Pa超大気圧以下が好ましい。
 前記絶対圧は、10-3Pa以上大気圧以下がより好ましく、100Pa以上大気圧以下がさらに好ましく、1000Pa以上大気圧以下が特に好ましい。
 第1の積層体と第2の積層体とを接合するとき、大気雰囲気下で行ってもよく、不活性ガス(窒素ガス、アルゴンガス、ヘリウムガス等)雰囲気下で行ってもよい。
There is no particular restriction on the pressure at which the first laminate and the second laminate are bonded, and the absolute pressure is preferably 10 −4 Pa or less superatmospheric pressure.
The absolute pressure is more preferably at least 10 −3 Pa and at most atmospheric pressure, even more preferably at least 100 Pa and at most atmospheric pressure, particularly preferably at least 1000 Pa and at most atmospheric pressure.
When joining the first laminate and the second laminate, it may be performed in an atmospheric atmosphere or in an inert gas (nitrogen gas, argon gas, helium gas, etc.) atmosphere.

 工程Cでは、第1の樹脂層と第2の無機材層とを接触させた状態にて第1の積層体及び第2の積層体を100℃~450℃で加熱することが好ましい。
 なお、前述の温度は、第1の基板の第1の樹脂層が形成された面の温度を指す。
 前記温度は、100℃~400℃が好ましく、130℃~350℃がより好ましく、150℃~300℃がより好ましく、150~250℃がさらに好ましく、150~200℃が特に好ましい。
In step C, the first laminate and the second laminate are preferably heated at 100° C. to 450° C. while the first resin layer and the second inorganic layer are in contact with each other.
Note that the above temperature refers to the temperature of the surface of the first substrate on which the first resin layer is formed.
The temperature is preferably 100°C to 400°C, more preferably 130°C to 350°C, more preferably 150°C to 300°C, even more preferably 150°C to 250°C, and particularly preferably 150°C to 200°C.

 工程Bにて第1の樹脂層側に設けられた電極が第2の無機材層に設けられた電極と接触するように各電極が配置されている場合、前述の温度は130℃以上であることが好ましく、150℃以上であることがより好ましく、200℃以上であることがさらに好ましい。これにより、第1の樹脂層側に設けられた電極及び第2の無機材層に設けられた電極に含まれる成分(例えば、銅)が拡散し、電極同士の接合強度が高まる傾向にある。 When each electrode is arranged so that the electrode provided on the first resin layer side contacts the electrode provided on the second inorganic material layer in step B, the above-mentioned temperature is 130 ° C. or higher. The temperature is preferably 150°C or higher, more preferably 200°C or higher. As a result, components (for example, copper) contained in the electrodes provided on the first resin layer side and the electrodes provided on the second inorganic material layer tend to diffuse, and the bonding strength between the electrodes tends to increase.

 工程Cにおける加熱は、炉又はホットプレートを用いた通常の方法により行うことができる。
 また、工程Cにおける加熱は、大気雰囲気下で行ってもよく、不活性ガス(窒素ガス、アルゴンガス、ヘリウムガス等)雰囲気下で行ってもよい。
 工程Cにおける加熱時間については特に制限はなく、例えば3時間以下であり、1時間以下が好ましい。加熱の時間の下限には特に制限はなく、例えば5分間とすることができる。
Heating in step C can be performed by a conventional method using a furnace or a hot plate.
Further, the heating in step C may be performed in an atmospheric atmosphere or in an inert gas (nitrogen gas, argon gas, helium gas, etc.) atmosphere.
The heating time in step C is not particularly limited, and is, for example, 3 hours or less, preferably 1 hour or less. There is no particular restriction on the lower limit of the heating time, and it can be set to, for example, 5 minutes.

 工程Cでは、第1の積層体と第2の積層体との接合強度を高める点から、第1の樹脂層と第2の無機材層とを接触させた状態にて第1の積層体及び第2の積層体を加圧してもよい。加圧は、加熱と同時に行ってもよい。
 第1の積層体及び第2の積層体を加圧するときの圧力は特に制限はなく、0.1MPa以上10MPa以下が好ましく、0.1MPa以上5MPa以下がより好ましい。加圧装置としては、例えば、株式会社東洋精機製作所 製のTEST MINI PRESS等を用いればよい。
In step C, in order to increase the bonding strength between the first laminate and the second laminate, the first laminate and the second laminate are bonded with the first resin layer and the second inorganic material layer in contact with each other. The second laminate may be pressurized. Pressurization may be performed simultaneously with heating.
The pressure when pressurizing the first laminate and the second laminate is not particularly limited, and is preferably 0.1 MPa or more and 10 MPa or less, more preferably 0.1 MPa or more and 5 MPa or less. As the pressurizing device, for example, TEST MINI PRESS manufactured by Toyo Seiki Seisakusho Co., Ltd. may be used.

 本開示の基板積層体の製造方法は、工程Cの後に、第1の無機材層側の面から第2の樹脂層側の面に向かって第1の積層体及び第2の積層体に貫通孔を設け、貫通孔に第1の積層体及び第2の積層体を貫通する電極を形成する工程を含んでいてもよい。工程Cにて得られる基板積層体に電極が形成されていない場合に、この電極を形成する工程が行われることで、貫通孔に第1の積層体及び第2の積層体を貫通する電極が形成されることが好ましい。 The method for manufacturing a substrate laminate of the present disclosure includes, after step C, penetrating the first laminate and the second laminate from the first inorganic layer side surface to the second resin layer side surface. The method may include a step of providing a hole and forming an electrode that penetrates the first stacked body and the second stacked body in the through hole. When electrodes are not formed in the substrate laminate obtained in step C, by performing the step of forming the electrodes, the electrodes penetrating the first laminate and the second laminate are formed in the through holes. Preferably, it is formed.

 例えば、第1の積層体及び第2の積層体を貫通する貫通孔を公知の方法により形成し、形成された孔に電極を形成してもよい。孔の形成方法としては、ガスを使用して行われるドライエッチング、レーザーアブレーション等が挙げられる。 For example, a through hole penetrating the first laminate and the second laminate may be formed by a known method, and an electrode may be formed in the formed hole. Examples of methods for forming the holes include dry etching using gas, laser ablation, and the like.

 第1の積層体及び第2の積層体を貫通する電極の形成方法としては、電界めっき、無電解めっき、スパッタリング、インクジェット法等が挙げられる。 Examples of methods for forming electrodes penetrating the first laminate and the second laminate include electrolytic plating, electroless plating, sputtering, and inkjet methods.

 第1の積層体及び第2の積層体を貫通する電極の材料としては、特に限定されず、従来公知の電極材料等が挙げられる。具体的には、銅、はんだ、すず、金、銀、アルミニウム、インジウム、コバルト、タングステン等が挙げられる。 The material of the electrodes penetrating the first laminate and the second laminate is not particularly limited, and conventionally known electrode materials may be used. Specific examples include copper, solder, tin, gold, silver, aluminum, indium, cobalt, and tungsten.

 本開示の基板積層体の製造方法では、第1の基板及び第2の基板の少なくとも一方は、第1の無機材層側の面及び第2の樹脂層側の面に、さらに別の基板、別の積層体等を積層させてもよい。別の基板の好ましい材質は、第1の基板及び第2の基板の好ましい材質と同様である。別の積層体の好ましい態様は、第1の積層体及び第2の積層体の好ましい態様と同様である。 In the method for manufacturing a substrate laminate of the present disclosure, at least one of the first substrate and the second substrate further includes another substrate on a surface on the first inorganic material layer side and a surface on the second resin layer side. Another laminate or the like may be laminated. The preferred material for the other substrate is the same as the preferred material for the first substrate and the second substrate. Preferred embodiments of the other laminate are the same as those of the first laminate and the second laminate.

 本開示の基板積層体の製造方法では、工程Cの後に必要に応じて、基板積層体の表面に薄化加工(バックグラインディング、又は裏面研削)を行ってもよい。 In the method for manufacturing a substrate laminate of the present disclosure, after step C, the surface of the substrate laminate may be subjected to thinning processing (back grinding or back grinding) if necessary.

(基板積層体の積層構造の例)
 以下に、各用途における基板積層体の積層構造の例を示す。なお、接合層とは、無機材層/樹脂層からなる接合状態の層を意味する。
 MEMSパッケージング用;Si/接合層/Si、SiO/接合層/Si、SiO/接合層/SiO、Cu/接合層/Cu、
 マイクロ流路用;PDMS/接合層/PDMS、PDMS/接合層/SiO
 CMOSイメージセンサー用;SiO/接合層/SiO、Si/接合層/Si、SiO/接合層/Si、
 シリコン貫通ビア(TSV)用;SiO(Cu電極付き)/接合層/SiO(Cu電極付き)、Si(Cu電極付き)/接合層/Si(Cu電極付き)、
 光学デバイス用;(InGaAlAs、InGaAs、InP、GaAs)/接合層/Si、
 LED用;(InGaAlAs、GaAs、GaN)/接合層/Si、(InGaAlAs、GaAs、GaN)/接合層/SiO、(InGaAlAs、GaAs、GaN)/接合層/(Au、Ag、Al)、(InGaAlAs、GaAs、GaN)/接合層/サファイア。
(Example of laminated structure of substrate laminate)
Examples of the laminated structure of the substrate laminate for each application are shown below. Note that the bonding layer means a layer in a bonded state consisting of an inorganic material layer/resin layer.
For MEMS packaging; Si/bonding layer/Si, SiO2 /bonding layer/Si, SiO2 /bonding layer/ SiO2 , Cu/bonding layer/Cu,
For microchannel; PDMS/bonding layer/PDMS, PDMS/bonding layer/SiO 2 ,
For CMOS image sensor; SiO 2 /bonding layer/SiO 2 , Si/bonding layer/Si, SiO 2 /bonding layer/Si,
For through silicon vias (TSV); SiO 2 (with Cu electrode) / bonding layer / SiO 2 (with Cu electrode), Si (with Cu electrode) / bonding layer / Si (with Cu electrode),
For optical devices; (InGaAlAs, InGaAs, InP, GaAs)/bonding layer/Si,
For LED; (InGaAlAs, GaAs, GaN)/bonding layer/Si, (InGaAlAs, GaAs, GaN)/bonding layer/SiO 2 , (InGaAlAs, GaAs, GaN)/bonding layer/(Au, Ag, Al), ( InGaAlAs, GaAs, GaN)/bonding layer/sapphire.

 以下、図1a~図1h及び図2a~図2iを用いて基板積層体の製造方法の例について説明する。なお、本開示は、図面に示された構成に限定されない。また、図1a~図1h及び図2a~図2iにおける部材の大きさは概念的なものであり、部材間の大きさの相対的な関係はこれに限定されない。また、各図面において、実質的に同じ機能を有する部材には、全図面同じ符号を付与し、重複する説明は省略する場合がある。 Hereinafter, an example of a method for manufacturing a substrate stack will be described using FIGS. 1a to 1h and FIGS. 2a to 2i. Note that the present disclosure is not limited to the configuration shown in the drawings. Furthermore, the sizes of the members in FIGS. 1a to 1h and 2a to 2i are conceptual, and the relative size relationships between the members are not limited thereto. Further, in each drawing, members having substantially the same function are given the same reference numerals in all drawings, and overlapping explanations may be omitted.

〈基板積層体の製造方法の例1〉
 以下、図1a~図1hを用いて基板積層体の製造方法の例1について説明する。図1aに示すように、貫通した電極4を備え、表面が平坦化されたウエハ3を準備する。ウエハ3の表面には、酸化膜等の無機材層5が形成されている。電極4を備えるウエハ3を仮止め材2を介してキャリア1に固定する。
<Example 1 of manufacturing method of substrate laminate>
Hereinafter, Example 1 of the method for manufacturing a substrate stack will be described using FIGS. 1a to 1h. As shown in FIG. 1a, a wafer 3 having a flattened surface and having electrodes 4 extending therethrough is prepared. An inorganic material layer 5 such as an oxide film is formed on the surface of the wafer 3. A wafer 3 provided with an electrode 4 is fixed to a carrier 1 via a temporary fixing material 2.

 次に、図1bに示すように、ウエハ3表面の無機材層5に対して前述のような表面活性化処理を施す。 Next, as shown in FIG. 1b, the inorganic material layer 5 on the surface of the wafer 3 is subjected to the surface activation treatment as described above.

 さらに、無機材層15と、ウエハ13と、樹脂層16とをこの順番で備え、ウエハ13を貫通する電極14をさらに備える積層体を準備する。図1cに示すように、積層体における無機材層15側に表面保護材6が配置されている。 Furthermore, a laminate is prepared that includes an inorganic material layer 15, a wafer 13, and a resin layer 16 in this order, and further includes an electrode 14 that penetrates the wafer 13. As shown in FIG. 1c, a surface protection material 6 is disposed on the inorganic material layer 15 side of the laminate.

 図1dに示すように積層体をダイシングした後に表面保護材6を剥離して、個片化積層体を得る。個片化積層体は、それぞれが個片化された無機材層15Aと、ウエハ13Aと、樹脂層16Aとをこの順番で備える。さらに、個片化積層体は、個片化積層体を貫通する電極14Aを備える。異物除去の観点から、表面保護材6の剥離後に純水、溶剤等で個片化積層体の表面を洗浄してもよい。このとき、複数の個片化積層体をフレームに積載したまま一括して洗浄してもよい。 As shown in FIG. 1d, after dicing the laminate, the surface protection material 6 is peeled off to obtain a singulated laminate. The singulation laminate includes, in this order, an inorganic material layer 15A, a wafer 13A, and a resin layer 16A, each of which has been singulated. Furthermore, the singulated laminate includes an electrode 14A that penetrates the singulated laminate. From the viewpoint of removing foreign matter, the surface of the singulated laminate may be washed with pure water, a solvent, etc. after the surface protection material 6 is peeled off. At this time, a plurality of singulated laminates may be washed all at once while being loaded on the frame.

 次に、図1eに示すように、ウエハ3表面の無機材層5と、個片化積層体の樹脂層16Aとを接触させて仮固定する。このとき、幅方向及び長さ方向に沿って個片化積層体を複数仮固定してもよい。 Next, as shown in FIG. 1e, the inorganic material layer 5 on the surface of the wafer 3 and the resin layer 16A of the singulated laminate are brought into contact and temporarily fixed. At this time, a plurality of singulated laminates may be temporarily fixed along the width direction and the length direction.

 図1fに示すように、ウエハ3に仮固定された個片化積層体の無機材層15Aに対して前述のような表面活性化処理を施す。表面活性化後に純水、溶剤等で無機材層15Aの表面を洗浄してもよい。 As shown in FIG. 1f, the inorganic material layer 15A of the singulated laminate temporarily fixed to the wafer 3 is subjected to the surface activation treatment as described above. After surface activation, the surface of the inorganic layer 15A may be washed with pure water, a solvent, or the like.

 図1c及び図1dに示す手順で、それぞれが個片化された無機材層15Bと、ウエハ13Bと、樹脂層16Bとをこの順番で備える個片化積層体を得る。個片化積層体は、個片化積層体を貫通する電極14Bを備える。図1gに示すように、ウエハ3に仮固定された個片化積層体の無機材層15Aと、個片化積層体の樹脂層16Bと、を接触させて仮固定する。このとき、幅方向及び長さ方向に沿って個片化積層体を複数仮固定してもよい。 According to the procedure shown in FIGS. 1c and 1d, a singulated laminate is obtained, each of which includes the singulated inorganic material layer 15B, the wafer 13B, and the resin layer 16B in this order. The singulated laminate includes an electrode 14B that penetrates the singulated laminate. As shown in FIG. 1g, the inorganic material layer 15A of the singulated laminate temporarily fixed to the wafer 3 and the resin layer 16B of the singulated laminate are brought into contact and temporarily fixed. At this time, a plurality of singulated laminates may be temporarily fixed along the width direction and the length direction.

 図1f及び図1gに示す処理を繰り返すことで、高さ方向に個片化積層体が仮固定された状態で積層される。個片化積層体の積層が完了した後に、個片化積層体の積層体を100℃以上で加熱する。これにより、無機材層5と樹脂層16Aとを介してウエハ3及び個片化されたウエハ13Bを接合し、個片化された各無機材層と各樹脂層とを介して高さ方向に積層された個片化積層体を接合することができる。各電極同士の接合強度を高める観点から、個片化積層体の積層体を130℃以上で加熱することが好ましい。これにより、各電極に含まれる成分(例えば、銅)が拡散し、電極同士の接合強度が高まる傾向にある。
 以上により、図1hに示すように、基板積層体100が得られる。
By repeating the process shown in FIGS. 1f and 1g, the singulated laminates are stacked in a temporarily fixed state in the height direction. After the stacking of the singulated laminates is completed, the laminate of the singulated laminates is heated at 100° C. or higher. As a result, the wafer 3 and the singulated wafer 13B are bonded via the inorganic material layer 5 and the resin layer 16A, and the wafer 3 and the singulated wafer 13B are bonded in the height direction via each of the singulated inorganic material layers and each resin layer. The stacked singulated laminates can be joined. From the viewpoint of increasing the bonding strength between each electrode, it is preferable to heat the laminate of the singulated laminate at 130° C. or higher. As a result, components (for example, copper) contained in each electrode tend to diffuse, and the bonding strength between the electrodes tends to increase.
Through the above steps, a substrate laminate 100 is obtained as shown in FIG. 1h.

〈基板積層体の製造方法の例2〉
 以下、図2a~図2iを用いて基板積層体の製造方法の例2について説明する。基板積層体の製造方法の例2では、電極を備えていないウエハを用い、最終的に電極が設けられていない基板積層体に貫通孔を設け、当該貫通孔に電極を設ける点で、前述の基板積層体の製造方法の例1と相違する。
<Example 2 of manufacturing method of substrate laminate>
Example 2 of the method for manufacturing a substrate stack will be described below with reference to FIGS. 2a to 2i. In Example 2 of the manufacturing method of a substrate stack, a wafer without electrodes is used, a through hole is finally provided in the substrate stack without electrodes, and an electrode is provided in the through hole, which is the same as described above. This is different from Example 1 of the method for manufacturing a substrate laminate.

 図2aに示すように、表面が平坦化されたウエハ23を準備する。ウエハ23の表面には、酸化膜等の無機材層25が形成されている。ウエハ23を仮止め材2を介してキャリア1に固定する。 As shown in FIG. 2a, a wafer 23 with a flattened surface is prepared. An inorganic material layer 25 such as an oxide film is formed on the surface of the wafer 23 . The wafer 23 is fixed to the carrier 1 via the temporary fixing material 2.

 次に、図2bに示すように、ウエハ23表面の無機材層25に対して前述のような表面活性化処理を施す。 Next, as shown in FIG. 2b, the inorganic material layer 25 on the surface of the wafer 23 is subjected to the surface activation treatment as described above.

 さらに、無機材層35と、ウエハ33と、樹脂層36とをこの順番で備える積層体を準備する。図2cに示すように、積層体における無機材層35側に表面保護材6が配置されている。 Further, a laminate including an inorganic material layer 35, a wafer 33, and a resin layer 36 in this order is prepared. As shown in FIG. 2c, a surface protection material 6 is disposed on the inorganic material layer 35 side of the laminate.

 図2dに示すように積層体をダイシングした後に表面保護材6を剥離して、個片化積層体を得る。個片化積層体は、それぞれが個片化された無機材層35Aと、ウエハ33Aと、樹脂層36Aとをこの順番で備える。異物除去の観点から、表面保護材6の剥離後に純水、溶剤等で個片化積層体の表面を洗浄してもよい。このとき、複数の個片化積層体をフレームに積載したまま一括して洗浄してもよい。 As shown in FIG. 2d, after dicing the laminate, the surface protection material 6 is peeled off to obtain a singulated laminate. The singulation laminate includes, in this order, an inorganic material layer 35A, a wafer 33A, and a resin layer 36A, each of which has been singulated. From the viewpoint of removing foreign matter, the surface of the singulated laminate may be washed with pure water, a solvent, etc. after the surface protection material 6 is peeled off. At this time, a plurality of singulated laminates may be washed all at once while being loaded on the frame.

 次に、図2eに示すように、ウエハ23表面の無機材層25と、個片化積層体の樹脂層36Aとを接触させて仮固定する。このとき、幅方向及び長さ方向に沿って個片化積層体を複数仮固定してもよい。 Next, as shown in FIG. 2e, the inorganic material layer 25 on the surface of the wafer 23 and the resin layer 36A of the singulated laminate are brought into contact and temporarily fixed. At this time, a plurality of singulated laminates may be temporarily fixed along the width direction and the length direction.

 図2fに示すように、ウエハ23に仮固定された個片化積層体の無機材層35Aに対して前述のような表面活性化処理を施す。表面活性化後に純水、溶剤等で無機材層35Aの表面を洗浄してもよい。 As shown in FIG. 2f, the inorganic material layer 35A of the singulated laminate temporarily fixed to the wafer 23 is subjected to the surface activation treatment as described above. After surface activation, the surface of the inorganic layer 35A may be washed with pure water, a solvent, or the like.

 図2c及び図2dに示す手順で、それぞれが個片化された無機材層35Bと、ウエハ33Bと、樹脂層36Bとをこの順番で備える個片化積層体を得る。図2gに示すように、ウエハ23に仮固定された個片化積層体の無機材層35Aと、個片化積層体の樹脂層36Bと、を接触させて仮固定する。このとき、幅方向及び長さ方向に沿って個片化積層体を複数仮固定してもよい。 In accordance with the procedure shown in FIGS. 2c and 2d, a singulated laminate is obtained which includes an inorganic material layer 35B, a wafer 33B, and a resin layer 36B, each of which has been singulated, in this order. As shown in FIG. 2g, the inorganic material layer 35A of the singulated laminate temporarily fixed to the wafer 23 and the resin layer 36B of the singulated laminate are brought into contact and temporarily fixed. At this time, a plurality of singulated laminates may be temporarily fixed along the width direction and the length direction.

 図2f及び図2gに示す処理を繰り返すことで、高さ方向に個片化積層体が仮固定された状態で積層される。個片化積層体の積層が完了した後に、個片化積層体の積層体を100℃以上で加熱する。これにより、無機材層25と樹脂層36Aとを介してウエハ23及び個片化されたウエハ33Bを接合し、個片化された各無機材層と各樹脂層とを介して高さ方向に積層された個片化積層体を接合することができる。その結果、図2hに示すように、基板積層体200が得られる。 By repeating the process shown in FIGS. 2f and 2g, the singulated laminates are stacked in a temporarily fixed state in the height direction. After the stacking of the singulated laminates is completed, the laminate of the singulated laminates is heated at 100° C. or higher. As a result, the wafer 23 and the singulated wafer 33B are bonded via the inorganic material layer 25 and the resin layer 36A, and the wafer 23 and the singulated wafer 33B are bonded in the height direction through the inorganic material layer 25 and the resin layer 36A. The stacked singulated laminates can be joined. As a result, a substrate stack 200 is obtained, as shown in FIG. 2h.

 さらに、基板積層体200に対して積層された個片化積層体を高さ方向に沿って貫通する貫通孔を設ける。貫通孔の形成方法としては、ガスを使用して行われるドライエッチング、レーザーアブレーション等が挙げられる。次いで、貫通孔に対して積層された個片化積層体を貫通する電極34を形成する。
 以上により、図2iに示すように、個片化積層体を貫通する電極34を備える基板積層体300が得られる。
Furthermore, a through hole is provided that penetrates the singulated laminate stacked on the substrate laminate 200 along the height direction. Examples of methods for forming the through holes include dry etching using gas, laser ablation, and the like. Next, an electrode 34 is formed that penetrates the singulated laminate stacked against the through hole.
Through the above steps, as shown in FIG. 2i, a substrate stack 300 including electrodes 34 penetrating the singulated stack is obtained.

〔基板積層体〕
 本開示の基板積層体は、第1の樹脂層、第1の基板、第1の無機材層とをこの順に有し、前記第1の樹脂層が一方の表面に配置されており、前記第1の無機材層がもう一方の表面に配置されている第1の積層体と、
 第2の樹脂層、第2の基板、第2の無機材層とをこの順に有し、前記第2の樹脂層が一方の表面に配置されており、前記第2の無機材層がもう一方の表面に配置されている第2の積層体と、
 を有し、
 前記第1の積層体の前記第1の樹脂層と前記第2の積層体の前記第2の無機材層とを介して前記第1の積層体及び前記第2の積層体が積層されている。
 本開示の基板積層体における第1の積層体及び第2の積層体としては、ウエハ等の基板上に3次元的に実装される積層体であってもよく、前述の本開示の基板積層体の製造方法に用いられる第1の積層体、第2の積層体等が挙げられる。基板積層体における第1の積層体及び第2の積層体の好ましい形態としては、前述の本開示の基板積層体の製造方法における第1の積層体及び第2の積層体の好ましい形態と同様である。
 例えば、基板積層体における第1の積層体及び第2の積層体の具体例としては、図1c又は図2cに示されるような積層体、図1d及び図2dに示されるような個片化された積層体が挙げられる。
 なお本開示の基板積層体における第1の積層体又は第2の積層体は、3次元半導体装置用の積層体であることが好ましい。
[Substrate laminate]
The substrate laminate of the present disclosure includes a first resin layer, a first substrate, and a first inorganic material layer in this order, the first resin layer is disposed on one surface, and the first resin layer is arranged on one surface, and a first laminate in which one inorganic layer is disposed on the other surface;
It has a second resin layer, a second substrate, and a second inorganic material layer in this order, the second resin layer being disposed on one surface, and the second inorganic material layer being disposed on the other surface. a second laminate placed on the surface of the
has
The first laminate and the second laminate are laminated via the first resin layer of the first laminate and the second inorganic layer of the second laminate. .
The first laminate and the second laminate in the substrate laminate of the present disclosure may be a laminate three-dimensionally mounted on a substrate such as a wafer, and the substrate laminate of the present disclosure described above may be a laminate that is three-dimensionally mounted on a substrate such as a wafer. Examples include a first laminate, a second laminate, etc. used in the manufacturing method. Preferred forms of the first laminate and the second laminate in the substrate laminate are similar to the preferred forms of the first laminate and the second laminate in the method for manufacturing a substrate laminate of the present disclosure described above. be.
For example, specific examples of the first laminate and the second laminate in the substrate laminate include a laminate as shown in FIG. 1c or 2c, and a singulated laminate as shown in FIGS. 1d and 2d. Examples include laminated bodies.
Note that the first laminate or the second laminate in the substrate laminate of the present disclosure is preferably a laminate for a three-dimensional semiconductor device.

 本開示の基板積層体において、前記第1の積層体は、前記第1の樹脂層の表面の一部及び前記第1の無機材層の表面の一部に電極を備え、
 前記第2の積層体は、前記第2の樹脂層の表面の一部及び前記第2の無機材層の表面の一部に電極を備えることが好ましい。
 なお電極の好ましい形態としては、前述の本開示の基板積層体の製造方法における電極の好ましい形態と同様である。
In the substrate laminate of the present disclosure, the first laminate includes an electrode on a part of the surface of the first resin layer and a part of the surface of the first inorganic material layer,
The second laminate preferably includes electrodes on a part of the surface of the second resin layer and a part of the surface of the second inorganic material layer.
Note that the preferred form of the electrode is the same as the preferred form of the electrode in the method for manufacturing a substrate laminate of the present disclosure described above.

<基板積層体の製造方法の変形例>
 本開示の基板積層体の製造方法の変形例では、第1の積層体の代わりに、第1の樹脂層、第1の基板、第3の樹脂層の順番に積層された積層体(第3の積層体)を用い、かつ、第2の積層体の代わりに、第2の樹脂層、第1の基板、第4の樹脂層の順番に積層された積層体(第3の積層体)を用いる点で、前述の本開示の基板積層体の製造方法と相違する。つまり、積層体(第3の積層体)は、第1の積層体における第1の無機材層が、第3の樹脂層に置換されており、積層体(第4の積層体)は、第2の積層体における第2の無機材層が、第4の樹脂層に置換されている。そして、第1の樹脂層と、第4の樹脂層とが工程Cによって接合されることで、変形例にて基板積層体が得られる。
<Modified example of manufacturing method of substrate laminate>
In a modified example of the method for manufacturing a substrate laminate according to the present disclosure, instead of the first laminate, a laminate (third laminate), and instead of the second laminate, a laminate (third laminate) in which the second resin layer, the first substrate, and the fourth resin layer are laminated in this order. This method is different from the method for manufacturing a substrate laminate according to the present disclosure described above in that it is used. That is, in the laminate (third laminate), the first inorganic layer in the first laminate is replaced with the third resin layer, and in the laminate (fourth laminate), the first inorganic layer in the first laminate is replaced with the third resin layer. The second inorganic material layer in the second laminate is replaced with a fourth resin layer. Then, by joining the first resin layer and the fourth resin layer in step C, a substrate laminate is obtained in a modified example.

 変形例では、第1の樹脂層と、第4の樹脂層とは樹脂組成が異なることが好ましく、第1の樹脂層の形成に用いられる樹脂材料と、第4の樹脂層の形成に用いられる樹脂材料とは樹脂組成が異なることが好ましい。これにより、第3の積層体及び第4の積層体の厚さが小さい場合であっても、基板積層体の反りを好適に抑制できる傾向にある。 In the modified example, the first resin layer and the fourth resin layer preferably have different resin compositions, and the resin material used to form the first resin layer and the resin material used to form the fourth resin layer It is preferable that the resin composition is different from that of the resin material. Thereby, even if the thickness of the third laminate and the fourth laminate is small, warping of the substrate laminate tends to be suitably suppressed.

 第1の樹脂層の形成に用いられる樹脂材料としては、23℃における複合弾性率は、0.1GPa以上10GPaとなる樹脂層を形成可能な樹脂材料であることが好ましい。つまり、第1の樹脂層の23℃における複合弾性率は、0.1GPa以上10GPa以下であることが好ましい。
 第1の樹脂層の形成に用いられる樹脂材料、及び第1の樹脂層の好ましい条件は、前述の本開示の基板積層体の製造方法にて説明したこれらの好ましい条件と同様である。
The resin material used for forming the first resin layer is preferably a resin material capable of forming a resin layer having a composite modulus of elasticity of 0.1 GPa or more and 10 GPa at 23°C. That is, the composite modulus of elasticity of the first resin layer at 23° C. is preferably 0.1 GPa or more and 10 GPa or less.
The resin material used to form the first resin layer and the preferable conditions for the first resin layer are the same as the preferable conditions described in the above-mentioned method for manufacturing a substrate laminate of the present disclosure.

 第4の樹脂層の形成に用いられる樹脂材料としては、第1の樹脂層の形成に用いられる樹脂材料と組成が相違していれば特に限定されず、例えば、ポリイミド、ポリアミド、ポリアミドイミド、パリレン、ポリアリレンエーテル、テトラヒドロナフタレン、オクタヒドロアントラセン等の結合又は構造が架橋により形成される材料、ポリベンゾオキサザール、ポリベンゾオキサジン等の窒素環含有構造が形成される材料、Si-O等の結合又は構造が架橋により形成される材料、シロキサン変性化合物などの有機材料、ベンゾシクロブテン、エポキシ化合物などが挙げられる。 The resin material used to form the fourth resin layer is not particularly limited as long as it has a composition different from the resin material used to form the first resin layer, and examples thereof include polyimide, polyamide, polyamideimide, parylene, etc. , materials in which bonds or structures are formed by crosslinking, such as polyarylene ether, tetrahydronaphthalene, octahydroanthracene, etc., materials in which nitrogen ring-containing structures are formed, such as polybenzoxazal, polybenzoxazine, Si-O, etc. Examples include materials whose bonds or structures are formed by crosslinking, organic materials such as siloxane-modified compounds, benzocyclobutene, and epoxy compounds.

 第4の樹脂層の形成に用いられる樹脂材料は、ポリイミド結合が架橋により形成される材料、ベンゾシクロブテン、エポキシ化合物、シロキサン変性化合物等であることが好ましい。ポリイミド結合が架橋により形成される材料は、ポリイミド結合が架橋により形成されるシロキサン化合物であることが好ましく、シロキサン変性化合物は、エポキシ変性シロキサンであることが好ましい。 The resin material used to form the fourth resin layer is preferably a material in which polyimide bonds are formed by crosslinking, benzocyclobutene, epoxy compounds, siloxane-modified compounds, etc. The material in which polyimide bonds are formed by crosslinking is preferably a siloxane compound in which polyimide bonds are formed by crosslinking, and the siloxane-modified compound is preferably an epoxy-modified siloxane.

-符号の説明-
1:キャリア、2:仮止め材、3:ウエハ、4:電極、5:無機材層、6:表面保護材、13:ウエハ、13A:ウエハ、13B:ウエハ、14:電極、14A:電極、14B:電極、15:無機材層、15A:無機材層、15B:無機材層、16:樹脂層、16A:樹脂層、16B:樹脂層、23:ウエハ、25:無機材層、33:ウエハ、33A:ウエハ、33B:ウエハ、34:電極、35:無機材層、35A:無機材層、35B:無機材層、36:樹脂層、36A:樹脂層、36B:樹脂層、100:基板積層体、200:基板積層体、300:基板積層体
-Explanation of symbols-
1: carrier, 2: temporary fixing material, 3: wafer, 4: electrode, 5: inorganic material layer, 6: surface protection material, 13: wafer, 13A: wafer, 13B: wafer, 14: electrode, 14A: electrode, 14B: electrode, 15: inorganic layer, 15A: inorganic layer, 15B: inorganic layer, 16: resin layer, 16A: resin layer, 16B: resin layer, 23: wafer, 25: inorganic layer, 33: wafer , 33A: wafer, 33B: wafer, 34: electrode, 35: inorganic layer, 35A: inorganic layer, 35B: inorganic layer, 36: resin layer, 36A: resin layer, 36B: resin layer, 100: substrate stack body, 200: substrate laminate, 300: substrate laminate

 なお、2022年7月6日に出願された日本国特許出願2022-109052号の開示は、その全体が参照により本明細書に取り込まれる。また、本明細書に記載された全ての文献、特許出願及び技術規格は、個々の文献、特許出願、及び技術規格が参照により取り込まれることが具体的かつ個々に記された場合と同程度に、本明細書中に参照により取り込まれる。 Note that the disclosure of Japanese Patent Application No. 2022-109052 filed on July 6, 2022 is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. In addition, all documents, patent applications, and technical standards mentioned herein are incorporated by reference to the same extent as if each individual document, patent application, and technical standard were specifically and individually indicated to be incorporated by reference. , incorporated herein by reference.

Claims (14)

 第1の樹脂層、第1の基板、第1の無機材層の順番に積層されており、前記第1の樹脂層が一方の表面に配置されており、前記第1の無機材層がもう一方の表面に配置されている第1の積層体と、第2の樹脂層、第2の基板、第2の無機材層の順番に積層されており、前記第2の樹脂層が一方の表面に配置されており、前記第2の無機材層がもう一方の表面に配置されている第2の積層体と、を準備する工程Aと、
 前記第1の積層体の前記第1の樹脂層と前記第2の積層体の前記第2の無機材層とを接触させて前記第1の積層体及び前記第2の積層体を積層する工程Bと、
 前記工程Bの後に、前記第1の積層体及び前記第2の積層体を100℃以上で加熱する工程Cを含む、基板積層体の製造方法。
A first resin layer, a first substrate, and a first inorganic layer are laminated in this order, and the first resin layer is disposed on one surface, and the first inorganic layer is disposed on the other surface. A first laminate disposed on one surface, a second resin layer, a second substrate, and a second inorganic material layer are laminated in this order, and the second resin layer is disposed on one surface. a second laminate, the second inorganic material layer being disposed on the other surface;
Laminating the first laminate and the second laminate by bringing the first resin layer of the first laminate into contact with the second inorganic layer of the second laminate. B and
A method for manufacturing a substrate laminate, including a step C of heating the first laminate and the second laminate at 100° C. or higher after the step B.
 前記第1の積層体は、前記第1の樹脂層の表面の一部及び前記第1の無機材層の表面の一部に電極を備え、
 前記第2の積層体は、前記第2の樹脂層の表面の一部及び前記第2の無機材層の表面の一部に電極を備える、請求項1に記載の基板積層体の製造方法。
The first laminate includes an electrode on a part of the surface of the first resin layer and a part of the surface of the first inorganic material layer,
The method for manufacturing a substrate laminate according to claim 1, wherein the second laminate includes electrodes on a part of the surface of the second resin layer and a part of the surface of the second inorganic material layer.
 前記工程Bの前に、前記第2の無機材層に表面活性化処理を施す工程を含む、請求項2に記載の基板積層体の製造方法。 The method for manufacturing a substrate laminate according to claim 2, comprising a step of subjecting the second inorganic material layer to a surface activation treatment before the step B.  前記工程Cの後に、前記第1の無機材層側の面から前記第2の樹脂層側の面に向かって前記第1の積層体及び前記第2の積層体に貫通孔を設け、前記貫通孔に前記第1の積層体及び前記第2の積層体を貫通する電極を形成する工程を含む、請求項1に記載の基板積層体の製造方法。 After the step C, a through hole is provided in the first laminate and the second laminate from the first inorganic material layer side surface to the second resin layer side surface, and the through hole 2. The method of manufacturing a substrate laminate according to claim 1, comprising the step of forming an electrode penetrating the first laminate and the second laminate in the hole.  前記工程Bの前に、前記第2の無機材層を洗浄する工程を含む、請求項1~請求項4のいずれか1項に記載の基板積層体の製造方法。 The method for manufacturing a substrate laminate according to any one of claims 1 to 4, including a step of cleaning the second inorganic material layer before the step B.  前記工程Bの前に、前記第2の無機材層に表面保護層を設ける工程を含む、請求項1~請求項4のいずれか1項に記載の基板積層体の製造方法。 The method for manufacturing a substrate laminate according to any one of claims 1 to 4, including the step of providing a surface protective layer on the second inorganic layer before the step B.  前記工程Bにおける前記第1の樹脂層と前記第2の無機材層とを接触させる前にて、前記第1の樹脂層の23℃における複合弾性率は、0.1GPa以上20GPa以下である、請求項1~請求項4のいずれか1項に記載の基板積層体の製造方法。 Before the first resin layer and the second inorganic material layer are brought into contact in the step B, the composite modulus of elasticity of the first resin layer at 23° C. is 0.1 GPa or more and 20 GPa or less, A method for manufacturing a substrate laminate according to any one of claims 1 to 4.  前記工程Bにおける前記第1の樹脂層と前記第2の無機材層とを接触させる前にて、前記第1の樹脂層の硬化率は、70%以上100%以下である、請求項1~請求項4のいずれか1項に記載の基板積層体の製造方法。 The curing rate of the first resin layer is 70% or more and 100% or less before the first resin layer and the second inorganic material layer are brought into contact in the step B. The method for manufacturing a substrate laminate according to claim 4.  前記工程Bにおける前記第1の樹脂層と前記第2の無機材層とを接触させる前にて、前記第1の樹脂層の表面粗度(Ra)は、0.01nm以上1.2nm以下である、請求項1~請求項4のいずれか1項に記載の基板積層体の製造方法。 Before the first resin layer and the second inorganic layer are brought into contact in the step B, the surface roughness (Ra) of the first resin layer is 0.01 nm or more and 1.2 nm or less. The method for manufacturing a substrate laminate according to any one of claims 1 to 4.  前記第1の樹脂層の表面にシラノール基、アミノ基、エポキシ基、水酸基及び不飽和結合を有する官能基からなる群より選択される少なくとも1つの官能基を有する、請求項1~請求項4のいずれか1項に記載の基板積層体の製造方法。 Claims 1 to 4, wherein the first resin layer has at least one functional group selected from the group consisting of a silanol group, an amino group, an epoxy group, a hydroxyl group, and a functional group having an unsaturated bond on the surface of the first resin layer. A method for manufacturing a substrate laminate according to any one of the items.  前記第1の樹脂層は、
 シロキサン結合と、
 エステル結合、エーテル結合、アミド結合及びイミド結合からなる群より選択される少なくともいずれか1つと、を含む、請求項1~請求項4のいずれか1項に記載の基板積層体の製造方法。
The first resin layer is
siloxane bond,
The method for manufacturing a substrate laminate according to any one of claims 1 to 4, comprising at least one selected from the group consisting of an ester bond, an ether bond, an amide bond, and an imide bond.
 前記第2の無機材層は、Si、Ga、Ge及びAsからなる群より選択される少なくとも1種の元素を含む、請求項1~請求項4のいずれか1項に記載の基板積層体の製造方法。 The substrate laminate according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the second inorganic layer contains at least one element selected from the group consisting of Si, Ga, Ge, and As. Production method.  第1の樹脂層、第1の基板、第1の無機材層とをこの順に有し、前記第1の樹脂層が一方の表面に配置されており、前記第1の無機材層がもう一方の表面に配置されている第1の積層体と、
 第2の樹脂層、第2の基板、第2の無機材層とをこの順に有し、前記第2の樹脂層が一方の表面に配置されており、前記第2の無機材層がもう一方の表面に配置されている第2の積層体と、
 を有し、
 前記第1の積層体の前記第1の樹脂層と前記第2の積層体の前記第2の無機材層とを介して前記第1の積層体及び前記第2の積層体が積層されている、基板積層体。
It has a first resin layer, a first substrate, and a first inorganic material layer in this order, the first resin layer is arranged on one surface, and the first inorganic material layer is arranged on the other surface. a first laminate placed on the surface of the
It has a second resin layer, a second substrate, and a second inorganic material layer in this order, the second resin layer being disposed on one surface, and the second inorganic material layer being disposed on the other surface. a second laminate placed on the surface of the
has
The first laminate and the second laminate are laminated via the first resin layer of the first laminate and the second inorganic layer of the second laminate. , substrate laminate.
 前記第1の積層体は、前記第1の樹脂層の表面の一部及び前記第1の無機材層の表面の一部に電極を備え、
 前記第2の積層体は、前記第2の樹脂層の表面の一部及び前記第2の無機材層の表面の一部に電極を備える、請求項13に記載の基板積層体。
The first laminate includes an electrode on a part of the surface of the first resin layer and a part of the surface of the first inorganic material layer,
The substrate laminate according to claim 13, wherein the second laminate includes electrodes on a part of the surface of the second resin layer and a part of the surface of the second inorganic material layer.
PCT/JP2023/024825 2022-07-06 2023-07-04 Substrate layered body manufacturing method and substrate layered body Ceased WO2024010007A1 (en)

Priority Applications (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202380051289.7A CN119497906A (en) 2022-07-06 2023-07-04 Method for manufacturing substrate laminate and substrate laminate
KR1020257000027A KR20250021366A (en) 2022-07-06 2023-07-04 Method for manufacturing substrate laminate and substrate laminate
JP2024532595A JPWO2024010007A1 (en) 2022-07-06 2023-07-04

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2022109052 2022-07-06
JP2022-109052 2022-07-06

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2024010007A1 true WO2024010007A1 (en) 2024-01-11

Family

ID=89453434

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2023/024825 Ceased WO2024010007A1 (en) 2022-07-06 2023-07-04 Substrate layered body manufacturing method and substrate layered body

Country Status (5)

Country Link
JP (1) JPWO2024010007A1 (en)
KR (1) KR20250021366A (en)
CN (1) CN119497906A (en)
TW (1) TW202421441A (en)
WO (1) WO2024010007A1 (en)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2016062951A (en) * 2014-09-16 2016-04-25 国立大学法人東京工業大学 Manufacturing method of semiconductor device
JP2017124586A (en) * 2016-01-15 2017-07-20 東洋紡株式会社 Method for manufacturing flexible electronic device
US20210320086A1 (en) * 2020-04-09 2021-10-14 SK Hynix Inc. Semiconductor package including embedded solder connection structure
JP2021182621A (en) * 2020-05-14 2021-11-25 三井化学株式会社 Laminate, composition, and method for manufacturing laminate

Family Cites Families (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH04132258A (en) 1990-09-25 1992-05-06 Nec Corp Connecting body for semiconductor substrate and its connection
JP5201048B2 (en) 2009-03-25 2013-06-05 富士通株式会社 Semiconductor device and manufacturing method thereof
JP2016047895A (en) 2014-08-28 2016-04-07 株式会社ダイセル Adhesive composition for semiconductor

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2016062951A (en) * 2014-09-16 2016-04-25 国立大学法人東京工業大学 Manufacturing method of semiconductor device
JP2017124586A (en) * 2016-01-15 2017-07-20 東洋紡株式会社 Method for manufacturing flexible electronic device
US20210320086A1 (en) * 2020-04-09 2021-10-14 SK Hynix Inc. Semiconductor package including embedded solder connection structure
JP2021182621A (en) * 2020-05-14 2021-11-25 三井化学株式会社 Laminate, composition, and method for manufacturing laminate

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
KR20250021366A (en) 2025-02-12
TW202421441A (en) 2024-06-01
CN119497906A (en) 2025-02-21
JPWO2024010007A1 (en) 2024-01-11

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP7162679B2 (en) Substrate laminate manufacturing method and laminate
JP7351019B2 (en) Composition, laminate, and method for producing laminate
JP6781827B2 (en) Substrate laminate and method of manufacturing substrate laminate
WO2024029390A1 (en) Method for producing substrate laminate and semiconductor device
JP7772806B2 (en) Composition, laminate and substrate laminate for forming semiconductor film
JP7761656B2 (en) Composition, laminate and substrate laminate for forming semiconductor film
WO2024010007A1 (en) Substrate layered body manufacturing method and substrate layered body
WO2024177074A1 (en) Method for manufacturing substrate laminate
JP2025064295A (en) Method for manufacturing substrate laminate
WO2024177116A1 (en) Production method for semiconductor chip with resin layer and production method for substrate laminate
WO2024166789A1 (en) Semiconductor structure and production method for same
WO2024177149A1 (en) Semiconductor structure and method for producing same
WO2024225232A1 (en) Semiconductor structure and method for producing same
WO2024172044A1 (en) Method for manufacturing substrate layered body, layered body, and substrate layered body
JP2025086712A (en) Composition, laminate, and method for producing laminate

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23835538

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2024532595

Country of ref document: JP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 202380051289.7

Country of ref document: CN

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 20257000027

Country of ref document: KR

Kind code of ref document: A

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 1020257000027

Country of ref document: KR

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 1020257000027

Country of ref document: KR

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 202380051289.7

Country of ref document: CN

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 23835538

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1